Owner's Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL Ibiza 6P0012720BD Inglés (11.16)

6P0012720BD (11.16)

SEAT recommends SEAT recommends

Inglés SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional Ibiza About this manual The equipment marked with an aster- For the sake of the environment isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental tional extras for some versions, or are equipment supplied with the vehicle at the protection. time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries. units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with Note until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. Because this is a general manual for the IBIZA >> The section is continued on the follow- range, some of the equipment and functions ing page. that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts, Important warnings on a given page which are: cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page 3. Emergencies The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details. Audiovisual material on a given page 5. Tips The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the WARNING At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason cept when otherwise indicated. mation on safety. They warn you about possi- find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. ble dangers of accident or injury. The audiovisual material only is intended to All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error help users to understand certain car function- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. alities better. It does not replace the instruc- CAUTION Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- Texts with this symbol draw your attention to SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. al to obtain more comprehensive information potential sources of damage to your vehicle. and indications. All rights on changes are reserved. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16 Foreword

This Instruction Manual and its correspond- You can access the information in this man- WARNING ing supplements should be read carefully to ual using: familiarise yourself with your vehicle. Read and always observe safety informa- ● Thematic table of contents that follows the tion concerning the passenger's front air- Besides the regular care and maintenance of manual’s general chapter structure. bag ››› page 72, Important information the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre- ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics regarding the front passenger's airbag. » serve its value. to indicate the pages containing “essential” For safety reasons, always note the informa- information, which is detailed in the corre- tion concerning accessories, modifications sponding chapters. and part replacements. ● Alphabetical index with many terms and If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board synonyms to help you find information. documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the vehicle. Related videos

››› page 118 EcoTSI Engine Ambient light and natural light ››› page 122

Fatigue detection ››› page 171

Table of Contents

Correct position for passengers ...... 57 Communications and multimedia ...... 101 Table of Contents Pedal area ...... 61 Steering wheel controls* ...... 101 Seat belts ...... 61 Multimedia ...... 105 The essentials ...... 5 Why wear a seat belt? ...... 61 Opening and closing ...... 106 Exterior view ...... 5 How to properly adjust your seatbelt ...... 64 Central locking system ...... 106 Exterior view ...... 6 Belt pretensioners* ...... 65 Keys ...... 110 Interior view (left-hand drive) ...... 7 Airbag system ...... 66 Radio frequency remote control* ...... 110 Interior view (right-hand drive) ...... 8 Brief introduction ...... 66 Anti-theft alarm* ...... 111 How it works ...... 9 Airbag safety instructions ...... 69 Boot hatch ...... 113 Opening and closing ...... 9 Deactivating airbags ...... 70 Electric windows ...... 114 Before driving ...... 12 Transporting children safely ...... 72 Tilting panoramic roof* ...... 116 Airbags ...... 14 Safety for children ...... 72 Lights and visibility ...... 117 Child seats ...... 16 Child seats ...... 73 Lights ...... 117 Starting the vehicle ...... 21 Interior lights ...... 122 Lights and visibility ...... 21 Emergencies ...... 75 Visibility ...... 123 Easy Connect ...... 24 ...... 75 Self-help Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys- Driver information system ...... 25 Emergency equipment ...... 75 tems ...... 123 Journey data ...... 29 Tyre repair ...... 76 Rear view mirrors ...... 125 Cruise control ...... 34 Changing the windscreen wiper blades ...... 78 Seats and head restraints ...... 127 Warning lamps ...... 35 Towing or tow-starting ...... 79 Adjusting the seat and head restraints ...... 127 Gearbox lever ...... 37 Fuses and bulbs ...... 80 Seat functions ...... 128 Air conditioning ...... 39 Fuses ...... 80 Transport and practical equipment ...... 130 Fluid Level control ...... 40 Changing bulbs ...... 83 Practical equipment ...... 130 Emergencies ...... 44 Single headlight bulb change ...... 84 Luggage compartment ...... 133 Fuses ...... 44 Double headlight bulb change ...... 85 Roof rack/roof luggage rack* ...... 135 Bulbs ...... 45 Changing the AFS headlight bulbs ...... 87 Air conditioning ...... 137 Action in the event of a puncture ...... 45 Changing the fog light bulbs ...... 87 Heating, ventilation and cooling ...... 137 Changing a wheel ...... 47 Changing the tail light bulbs ...... 88 Heating and fresh air ...... 139 Snow chains ...... 50 Changing the side and interior bulbs ...... 89 Air conditioning* ...... 141 Emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 51 Climatronic* ...... 143 How to jump start ...... 52 Operation ...... 93 Driving ...... 145 Changing the windscreen wiper blades ...... 54 Controls and displays ...... 93 General instrument panel ...... 92 Address ...... 145 Safety ...... 56 Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 94 Starting and stopping the engine ...... 147 Safe driving ...... 56 Instruments ...... 94 Braking and parking ...... 149 Safety first! ...... 56 Warning and control lamps ...... 98 Braking and stability systems ...... 152 Advice about driving ...... 56 Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 99 Manual gearbox ...... 158 System settings (CAR)* ...... 99 Automatic gearbox* ...... 158 Run-in and economical driving ...... 164 3 Table of Contents

Engine management and exhaust gas purifica- Trailer mode ...... 217 tion system ...... 166 Wheels ...... 218 Driving tips ...... 169 Engine data ...... 219 Driver assistance systems ...... 170 Dimensions ...... 231 Start-Stop System* ...... 170 Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 171 Index ...... 233 Parking aid ...... 173 Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* ...... 177 Cruise speed* (cruise control - GRA) ...... 180 “SEAT Drive Profile” system ...... 182 Towing bracket device and trailer ...... 183 Trailer mode ...... 183 Retrofitting a towing bracket* ...... 185 Advice ...... 187 Care and maintenance ...... 187 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle ...... 187 Care and cleaning ...... 188 Care of the vehicle exterior ...... 189 Caring for the vehicle interior ...... 194 Checking and refilling levels ...... 196 Refuelling ...... 196 Fuel ...... 196 Working in the engine compartment ...... 198 Engine oil ...... 201 Cooling system ...... 204 Brake fluid ...... 206 Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 207 Vehicle battery ...... 207 Wheels ...... 210 Wheels and tyres ...... 210 Winter service ...... 214 Technical data ...... 216 Technical specifications ...... 216 Important information ...... 216 Information on fuel consumption ...... 217

4 The essentials Exterior view

1 ››› page 11 4 ››› page 45 7 ››› page 40 2 ››› page 9 5 ››› page 51 8 ››› page 10 3 ››› page 9 6 ››› page 41

5 The essentials Exterior view

1 ››› page 42 4 ››› page 44 7 ››› page 43 10 ››› page 134 2 ››› page 41 5 ››› page 43 8 ››› page 47 3 ››› page 43 6 ››› page 41 9 ››› page 46

6 The essentials Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 13 5 ››› page 35 9 ››› page 39 13 ››› page 37 17 ››› page 12 2 ››› page 21 6 ››› page 23 10 ››› page 22 14 ››› page 11 18 ››› page 12 3 ››› page 22 7 ››› page 25 11 ››› page 14 15 ››› page 10 19 ››› page 13 4 ››› page 34 8 ››› page 24 12 ››› page 21 16 ››› page 44

7 The essentials Interior view (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 22 5 ››› page 24 9 ››› page 21 13 ››› page 13 17 ››› page 21 2 ››› page 34 6 ››› page 23 10 ››› page 13 14 ››› page 37 18 ››› page 44 3 ››› page 22 7 ››› page 25 11 ››› page 10 15 ››› page 12 19 ››› page 11 4 ››› page 39 8 ››› page 35 12 ››› page 14 16 ››› page 12

8 The essentials How it works Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the Rear lid key Opening and closing ● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button. ● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button. Doors ● Unlocking the rear lid: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button until all the turn signals on the vehicle briefly light up.

Locking and unlocking with the central locking switch ● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. None of the doors can be opened from the outside. Fig. 3 Rear lid: opening from the outside. The doors can be opened from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. The rear lid opening system operates electri- ● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. cally. It is activated by using the handle on the boot lid. Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons. This system may or may not be operative, de- ››› in Description on page 106  pending on the situation of the vehicle.

››› page 106 If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be  opened, however if it is unlocked then the opening system is operative and the rear lid may be opened. To lock/unlock, press the button  or button  ››› Fig. 1 on the remote control key. A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or not properly Fig. 2 Centre console: Central lock buttons. closed.* An audible warning is also given if the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*. »

9 The essentials

● Opening the rear lid: Pull on the release There is a groove in the luggage compart- lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 3. The rear lid opens ment allowing access to the emergency automatically. opening mechanism. ● Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the handles on the interior lining and close it by Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage pushing gently. compartment ● Insert the key in the groove and unlock the ››› in Opening and closing on locking system, turning the key from right to  page 114 left, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 4.

 ››› page 10 Fig. 6 Cam under the bonnet Bonnet ● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under the dashboard ››› Fig. 5 1 . Unlocking the rear lid manually ● Lifting up the bonnet: press the release catch under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 6 2 . The arrester hook under the bonnet is released. ● Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.

››› in safety notes for work in the en-  gine compartment on page 198 Fig. 5 Release lever in the driver's footwell area.  ››› page 198 Fig. 4 Unlocking the rear lid manually.

This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking does not work (for example, if the battery is flat)

10 The essentials

● Electric windows* ››› in Opening and closing of the elec- Press the closing button again, keeping it  tric windows* on page 114 pressed down, until a complete opening and closing cycle has taken place.  ››› page 114 ››› in Opening or closing of the tilting  panoramic roof on page 116

Panoramic roof*  ››› page 116  ››› page 11

Fig. 7 Detail of the driver door: controls for the windows. Operation of the panoramic sunroof

● Opening the window: Press the  button. ● Closing the window: Pull the  button.

Buttons on the driver door Fig. 8 On the interior roof lining: Panoramic 1 Window on the front left door sunroof controls 2 Window on the front right door 3 Safety switch for deactivating the electric ● Opening: Press the ››› Fig. 8 A button once window buttons on the rear doors (only 5- only. If you keep it pressed down, it will open door vehicles) to the desired position. 4 Window on the rear left door (only 5-door ● Closing: Press the ››› Fig. 8 B button once Fig. 9 Emergency operation of the panoram- vehicles) only. If you keep it pressed down, it will close ic/tilting sunroof. to the desired position. 5 Window on the right rear door (only 5- In case of a breakdown, the sunroof may be door vehicles) Restoring one-touch opening and closing closed manually. ● Close the sunroof manually until it is com- ● Remove the plastic cover by inserting a pletely closed. Release the button. screwdriver into the rear section. »

11 The essentials

● Insert an Allen key (4 mm) into the opening 4 Folding down the backrest (only 3-door Adjustment of the seat belt as far as possible and close the sunroof. vehicles): pull the lever and push the backrest forward.

››› in Adjusting the front seats on Before driving  page 127 Manually adjusting the front seats Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 11 Front seat: adjustment of the head restraint. Fig. 12 Positioning and removing the seat belt buckle. ● Grab the sides of the head restraints with both hands and push upwards to the desired Fig. 10 Front seats: manual seat adjustment. position. To lower it, repeat the same action, pressing the 1 button on the side. 1 Forward/back: pull the lever and move the seat forwards or backwards. ››› in Adjusting or disassembling the  head restraints on page 128 2 Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever. 3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.  ››› page 60, ››› page 128

12 The essentials

Seat belt tensioners side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, right) to the direction desired. During a collision, the seat belts on the front  Folding in mirrors. seats are retracted automatically. The tensioner can be triggered only once. ››› in Electric exterior mirrors* on  page 126 ››› in Service and disposal of belt ten-  sioners on page 66  ››› page 126  ››› page 65 Fig. 13 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side. Adjusting the steering wheel

To adjust the seat belt around your should- Adjusting the exterior mirrors ers, adjust the height of the seats. The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body. The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pelvis. Fig. 15 Lever in the lower left side of the steering column. ››› page 63 Fig. 14 Detail of the driver door: control for  the exterior mirror. ● Adjusting the position of the steering wheel: Pull the ››› Fig. 15 1 lever down,  ››› page 64 Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob move the steering wheel to the desired posi- to the corresponding position: tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.

L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi- ››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po- tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver  sition on page 58

13 The essentials

Airbags and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision. front airbags The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

 ››› page 69

Deactivating the front passenger front airbag

Fig. 17 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ››› Fig. 16 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash Fig. 16 Driver airbag located in steering panel ››› Fig. 17. Airbags are identified by the wheel. word “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbags Fig. 18 Front passenger front airbag switch. are deployed, the covers remain attached to the steering wheel and dashboard, respec- To deactivate the front passenger front air- tively ››› Fig. 16 ››› Fig. 17. bag: In conjunction with the seat belts, the front ● Open the glove compartment on the front airbag system gives the driver and the front passenger side. passenger additional protection for the head 14 The essentials

● Insert the key blade into the slot provided Head-protection airbags* in the deactivation switch. ● Approximately ¾ of the length of the key blade remains inserted (the maximum). ● Turn the key blade, changing its position to . Do not force it. If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. ● Finally, check the control lamp on the instrument panel where it shows   Fig. 20 Illustration of completely inflated side    the following should appear . airbag on left side of vehicle. Fig. 21 Location and deployment area of the ››› in Deactivation of front passenger The side airbags are located in the driver's head-protection airbag.  front airbag* on page 71 seat and front passenger seat backrests ››› Fig. 19. The locations are identified by the ››› page 70 There is a head airbag on each side of the in-  text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the terior above the doors ››› Fig. 21. Airbags are backrests. identified by the word “AIRBAG”. In conjunction with the seat belts, the side The area framed in red is covered by the airbag system provides additional protection Side airbags* head-protection airbag when it is deployed for the upper body in the event of a severe ››› Fig. 21 (deployment area). Therefore, ob- side collision. jects should never be placed or mounted in In a side collision, the side airbags reduce this area ››› in Curtain airbags* on the risk of injury to passengers to the areas page 70. of the body facing the impact. In addition to In the event of a side collision the curtain air- their normal function of protecting the occu- bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve- pants in a collision, the front and rear outer hicle. seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these air- The head-protection airbags reduce the risk bags provide maximum protection. of injury to passengers in the front and rear side seats facing the impact. » Fig. 19 Side airbag in driver's seat.  ››› in Side airbags* on page 69 15 The essentials

 ››› in Curtain airbags* on page 70

Child seats

Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag

Fig. 23 On the rear frame of the passenger side door: airbag sticker.

A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passenger's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame.

››› in Important information regarding  the front passenger's airbag on page 72

Fig. 22 Passenger's side sun visor: airbag ››› page 72 sticker. 

16 The essentials

Ways to secure a child seat

Fig. 24 On the rear seats: Possible installations for the child seat.

Figure ››› Fig. 24 A shows the basic child restraint. In this case, adjust the height of the straint system mounting using lower retain- head restraint or remove it from the seat fol- ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig- lowing the instructions in the corresponding ure ››› Fig. 24 B shows the child restraint chapter ›››  page 128. Once you remove system mounting using the vehicle seat belt. the child seat, replace the head restraint in its original position. » You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the following ways:

● Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt. ● Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can be fastened without seatbelts, using the “ISO- FIX” system, using the “ISOFIX” ››› page 18 securing rings. ● During installation of some models of group I, II and III child seats in the rear seat, difficulty may arise in mounting given that the seat comes into contact with the head re- 17 The essentials

Seating position U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. Weight Front pas- Rear Rear group *: Move the front passenger seat as far senger side central back as possible, as high as possible a) seat seat seat and always disable the airbag.

Group 0 U* U U The systems include the child restraint sys- to 10 kg tem mounting with an upper retaining strap Group 0+ U* U U (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on to 13 kg the seat. Group I U* U U 9 to 18 kg  ››› in Safety instructions on page 73 Group II U* U U 15 to 25 kg

Group III U* U U 22 to 36 kg

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.

“ISOFIX” and Top Tether child seat mounting system*

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily FIX” rings are located between the rear seat To understand the compatibility of the "ISO- and safely on the rear outer seats with the backrest and the seat cushioning. The Top FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system. Tether* rings are located at the rear of the below. backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on The body weight permitted and information backrest or in the boot). each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la- are secured to the seat frame and, in others, bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi- they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO- universal” certification.

18 The essentials

Vehicle Isofix positions Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction Rear side seats

F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X Baby carrier G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU

B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU

A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU

Group II 15 to 25 kg ------Forward-facing ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg ------Forward-facing ---

IU: Suitable for ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

 ››› in Safety instructions on page 73

19 The essentials

Mount the child seat with the “ISOFIX Top Tether* retainer straps Securing the Top Tether* of the child systems” seat to the anchorage point

Fig. 26 Position of the Top Tether rings on the Fig. 25 ISOFIX securing rings. back of the rear seat. Fig. 27 Retainer strap: correct adjustment and fitting. When removing or fitting the child seat, Child seats with the Top Tether system come please be sure to follow the manufacturer's with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- Securing to the anchorage point located on instructions. cle anchor point, located at the back of the the rear of the backrest rear seat backrest and provide greater re- ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to ● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” restraint. deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer taining rings until the child seat can be heard The objective of this strap is to reduce the strap. to engage securely. If the child seat is fitted forward movement of the child seat in a with any other anti-rotation system, follow ● Guide the strap under the rear seat head re- crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the the manufacturer instructions carefully. straint ››› Fig. 27 (lift the head restraint where head from hitting the inside of the vehicle. necessary). ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en- ● Slide the strap and secure it properly with sure that it is secure. Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted the anchorage of the backrest. Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* seats ● Firmly tighten the Top Tether belt following attachment system are available from Techni- Currently, there are very few rear-facing child the manufacturer's instructions. cal Services. safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufac- Releasing the retaining strap turer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap. ● Loosen the strap following the manufacturer's instructions. 20 The essentials

● Push the lock and release it from the an- press the locking key on the selector lever Start-Stop System* choring support. and release it again. When you stop and release the clutch pedal, ● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. ››› in Safety instructions on page 73 into the ignition and turn it at the same time The ignition remains switched on.  as the steering wheel in the direction indicated by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn ››› in Ignition key positions on the steering wheel, it may be because it is  page 147 Starting the vehicle locked.  ››› page 147 Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow Ignition lock plugs reheating ● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2 position. Lights and visibility ● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1 position. Headlight switch ● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat when the ignition is switched on

Starting the engine ● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all the way down and move the gearbox lever in- Fig. 28 Ignition key positions. to neutral. Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni- ● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal tion and start the engine. and move the selector lever to the P position or into N. Locking and unlocking the steering wheel ● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- Fig. 29 Dash panel: light control. ● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not the key from the ignition and turn the wheel press the accelerator. ● Turn the switch to the required position until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic ››› Fig. 29. » gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P position in order to remove the key. If necessary,

21 The essentials

Sym- Ignition switch- Ignition is switch- Turn signal and main beam lever Hazard warning lights bol ed off ed on

Fog lights, dipped Light off or daytime beam and side  driving light on. lights off.

The “Coming home” and “Leaving Automatic control of  home” guide lights dipped beam and day- may be switched time running light. on.

 Side light on. Fig. 30 Turn signal and main beam lever Fig. 31 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn- Dipped beam head- Dipped beam switching lights.  light off ed on. More the lever to the required position: Switched on, for example:  Front fog lights: move the switch to the 1 Right turn signal: Right-hand parking    first position, from positions , or . light (ignition switched off). ● When approaching a traffic jam  Rear fog light: move the switch completely 2 Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light ● In an emergency    from positions , or . (ignition switched off). ● The vehicle has broken down Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or 3 Main beam switched on: Control lamp  ● When towing or being towed turn it to the  position. lit up on the instrument panel. 4 Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is ››› in Hazard warning lights  on ››› in Switching lights on and off on pushed. Control lamp  lit up.  page 122  page 117 Lever all the way down to switch it off.  ››› page 121  ››› page 117 ››› in Turn signal and main beam lever  on page 119  ››› page 119

22 The essentials

Interior lights Knob Function More the lever to the required position:

 Turning the reading light on and off Windscreen wipers interval wipe. Using the control ››› Fig. 33 A adjust the 1  interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or  ››› page 122 the sensitivity of the rain sensor. 2  Slow wipe.

3  Continuous wipe. Windscreen wipers and window wiper blade Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold 4  the lever down for more time to increase the wipe frequency.

Fig. 32 Detail of headliner: front interior light- Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer ing. function is activated by pushing the lever 5  forwards, and simultaneously the wind- Knob Function screen wipers start. Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper  Switches interior lights off. 6  will wipe the window approximately every six seconds.  Switches interior lights on. The rear window wash function is activa- Switches door contact control on (central po- 7 ted by pressing the lever, and the rear wip- sition).  er starts simultaneously. The interior lights come on automatically Fig. 33 Operating the windscreen wiper and when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is rear wiper  opened or the key is removed from the igni- ››› in Windscreen wipers on page 123 tion.  The lights go off a few seconds after all the More the lever to the required position: doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the 0 Windscreen wiper off. ››› page 123 ignition is switched on.    ››› page 54

23 The essentials

Easy Connect

CAR menu settings (Setup)

Fig. 34 Easy Connect: Main menu Fig. 35 Easy Connect: CAR menu

To select the settings menus, press the Easy ● Press the system's MENU button and then When the function button check box is activa- Connect  button and the Setup function the system's  ››› Fig. 34 button or  but- ted , the function is active. button. ton to go to the CAR menu ››› Fig. 35. Any changes made using the settings menus The actual number of menus available and ● Press the function button Setup to open the are automatically saved on closing the the name of the various options will depend menu Vehicle settings ››› Fig. 35. BACK menus. on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. ● To select a function in the menu, press the desired button. ● Switch the ignition on. ● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it When you press the menu button, the last se- on. lected menu will always be displayed.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 152

Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 213 Tyres Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 214

24 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Driver assistance Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 171

Parking and manoeu- Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound set- ParkPilot ››› page 173 vring tings, adjust volume

Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting ››› page 122 Vehicle lights Coming home/Leaving home func‐ Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function ››› page 119 tion

Windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 23

Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function ››› page 116 Opening and closing Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation ››› page 106

Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consumers, ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average Multifunction display – ››› page 25 speed, speeding warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from start”, restore data “total calculation”

Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, Date and time – – time format, set the date, date format

Measurement units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption –

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 33

All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view Factory settings – – mirrors, opening and closing, multi-function display Driver information system In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,  ››› in CAR menu (Setup) on page 100 the multifunction display can only be operat- Introduction ed with the steering wheel buttons.  ››› page 99 The number of menus displayed on the in- With the ignition switched on, it is possible strument panel will vary according to the ve- to read the different functions of the display hicle electronics and equipment. » by scrolling through the menus. 25 The essentials

A specialised workshop will be able to pro- WARNING gramme or modify additional functions, according to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- Any distraction may lead to an accident, with ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service. the risk of injury. ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- Some menu options can only be read when trols when driving. the vehicle is at a standstill. As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it will not be possible to read the menus. Some Operating the instrument panel me- warning messages can be confirmed and nus made to disappear with the windscreen wiper Fig. 37 Right side of multifunction steering lever button or the multifunction steering wheel: control buttons. wheel button. The information system also provides the fol- The driver information system is controlled lowing information and displays (depending with the multifunction steering wheel buttons on the vehicle's equipment): ››› Fig. 37 or with the windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 36 (if the vehicle is not equipped with Driving data ››› page 29 multifunction steering wheel). ■ Vehicle status ■ MFD from departure Enabling the main menu ■ MFD from refuelling ● Switch the ignition on. Fig. 36 Windscreen wiper lever: control but- ■ MFD total calculation ● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, tons. press button ››› Fig. 36 1 on the windscreen Assist systems ››› table on page 27 wiper lever or button  on the multifunction ■ Reverse (optional) steering wheel ››› Fig. 37. Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system ● If managed from the windscreen wiper lever: to display the main screen ››› page 27 or Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga- to return to the main menu from another tion system menu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 36 Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book- 2 . let Navigation system ● If managed from the multifunction steering Vehicle ››› table on page 27 wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. To go from point to point in the main menu, 26 The essentials press button   or   several times Menu Menu Function ››› Fig. 37. Menu Function Display of the current warning or infor- Select a submenu Vehicle mation texts and other system compo- Information and possible configura- status nents, depending on the equipment ● 2 Driving Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 36 on the tions of the multifunction display (MFD) ››› page 99. data windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn ››› page 29, ››› page 99. the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering Information and possible configura- wheel ››› Fig. 37 until the desired option ap- Assist tions of the driver assistance systems Outside temperature display pears marked on the menu. systems ››› page 99. ● The selected option is displayed between When the outside temperature is below +4°C two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is Information instructions from the acti- (+39°F), the “ice crystal” symbol (warning of displayed on the right:  vated navigation system: when a route guidance is activated, the turning ar- risk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, this ● To consult the submenu option, press but- rows and proximity bars are displayed. symbol flashes and then it remains lit until ton ››› Fig. 36 1 on the windscreen wiper The appearance is similar to the Easy the outside temperature rises above +6°C lever or button  on the multifunction steer- Navigation Connect system. (+43°F) ››› in Indications on the display on If route guidance is not activated, the ing wheel Fig. 37. page 96. ››› direction of travel (compass) and the name of the street along which you are When the vehicle is at a standstill or when Making changes according to the menu driving are shown ››› Booklet Naviga- travelling at very low speeds, the tempera- ● Make the desired changes with the rocker tion system. ture displayed may be higher than the true switch on the windscreen wiper lever or the Station display on the radio. outside temperature as a result of the heat thumbwheel of the multifunction steering Track name on the CD. produced by the engine. Audio Track name in Media mode ››› Book- wheel. To increase or decrease the values The temperatures measured range from more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster. let Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation system. -40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F). ● Mark or confirm the selection with button ››› Fig. 36 1 on the windscreen wiper lever Information and possible configura- tions of the mobile phone preinstalla- or button  on the multifunction steering Telephone tion ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Nav- wheel ››› Fig. 37. igation system.

In a racing circuit, measurement and memorisation of lap times by the vehi- Lap timer* cle and comparison with previously measured best times ››› page 31.

27 The essentials

Gear-change indicator Vehicles with an automatic gearbox* Bonnet, rear lid and doors open The display is only visible in tiptronic mode ›››  page 161. The following display symbols mean:

●  Shifting up a gear ●  Shifting down a gear

CAUTION The gear-change indicator is intended to help save fuel, but it is not intended to recom- Fig. 38 Instrument panel: gear-change indica- mend the right gear for all driving situations. tor (manual gearbox). In certain situations, only the driver can choose the correct gear (for instance when A gear change will be recommended if the overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or towing a trailer). gear you are in is not the most economical choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it means that you are already in the most eco- Note nomical gear. The display disappears from the instrument panel when you press the clutch pedal. Vehicles with a manual gearbox The following display symbols ››› Fig. 38 Fig. 39 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C: mean: front left door open; D: rear right door open (5-door vehicles only). ●  Change to a higher gear: the suggested gear appears to the right of the current gear When the ignition is switched on or when when a higher gear is recommended. driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are ●  Change to a lower gear: the suggested open will be indicated on the instrument pan- gear appears to the left of the current gear el display, and, as applicable, this will be in- when a lower gear is recommended. dicated audibly. The display may vary according to the type of instrument panel fitted. The gear recommendation may occasionally skip a gear (2nd  4th). 28 The essentials

Illustra- Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols) Changing between display modes on the Key to ››› Fig. 39 tion MFD Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible ● In vehicles without multifunction steering  Do not continue driving! warnings. wheel: Press the rocker switch  on the A The bonnet is open or is not properly A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct closed ››› page 198. levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in Warn- windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 36. ing symbols on page 99 ● Vehicles with a multifunction steering  Do not continue driving! Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces- wheel: turn the thumbwheel Fig. 37. B The rear lid is open or is not properly sary, request assistance from specialised personnel. ››› closed ››› page 9. Multifunction display memory  Do not continue driving! Informative text C, D A vehicle door is open or is not properly The multifunction display is equipped with closed ››› page 106. Information relating to different vehicle processes. three memories that work automatically: MFD from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD total calculation. On the screen display, you can read which memory is currently dis- Warning and information messages Assist systems submenu played. The system runs a check on certain compo- Assist Toggle between memories with the ignition nents and functions when the ignition is systems Function switched on and while the vehicle is moving. menu on and the memory displayed Faults in the operation are displayed on the Press the  button on the windscreen Switching the fatigue detection on screen using red and yellow symbols and Fatigue de- wiper lever or the  button of the multifunc- or off (pause recommendation) messages on the instrument panel display tection* tion steering wheel. ››› page 171. » (›››  page 98, ››› page 35) and, in some cases, with audible warnings. The display may vary according to the type of instrument panel fitted. Journey data

Priority 1 warning (red symbols) Memory Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible warnings. The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ-  Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warning ent values for the journey and the consump- symbols on page 99! tion. Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessary, request assistance from specialised personnel. 29 The essentials

Menu Function Personalising the displays Menu Function In the Easy Connect system you can adjust Display and storage of the values for This indicates the hours (h) and which of the possible displays of the MFD can Travelling the journey and the consumption minutes (min) since the ignition time from when the ignition is switched be shown on the instrument panel display was switched on. on to when it is switched off. with the button  and the function button If the journey is continued in less Setup ›››  page 99. Distance cov- Distance covered in km (m) after MFD from de- than 2 hours after the ignition is ered switching on the ignition. parture switched off, the new data is added to the data already stored in the The average speed will be shown memory. The memory will automati- Data summary after a distance of about 100 metres has been travelled. Otherwise cally be deleted if the journey is in- Average speed terrupted for more than 2 hours. horizontal lines are displayed. Menu Function The value shown is updated ap- Display and storage of the values for proximately every 5 seconds. MFD from re- the journey and the consumption. The current fuel consumption display operates throughout the Digital dis- Current speed displayed in digital fuelling By refuelling, the memory will be Current fuel journey, in litres/100 km; and play of speed format. erased automatically. consumption with the engine running and the If the stored speed is exceeded The memory records the values for a vehicle stopped, in litres/hour. Speed warning (between 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 - specific number of partial trips, up at --- km/h or 155 mph), an audible warning is to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi- After turning on the ignition, aver- Speed warning given together with a visual warn- nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, age fuel consumption in li- at --- mph MFD total or 1999.9 km or 9999 km, depend- tres/100 km will be displayed af- ing. calculation ing on the model of instrument pan- ter travelling about 100 metres. Oil tempera- Updated engine oil temperature el. On reaching either of these lim- Average fuel Otherwise horizontal lines are ture digital display itsa), the memory is automatically consumption displayed. The value shown is up- erased and starts to count from 0 dated approximately every 5 sec- Coolant tem- Digital display of the current tem- again. onds. perature gauge perature of the liquid coolant. ACT®*: Depending on the equip- a) It varies according to the instrument panel version. ment, number of active cylinders. Storing a speed with the speed warning Approximate distance in km that Erasing a memory manually can still be travelled with the fuel ● Select the display Speed warning at ● Select the memory that you wish to erase. Operating remaining in the tank, assuming --- km/h (--- mph) range the same style of driving is main- ●  ● Press the button  on the windscreen Hold the button of the multifunction tained. This is calculated using  steering wheel or the  button of the multi- the current fuel consumption. wiper lever or the button on the multifunc- function wheel pressed down for about 2 section steering wheel to store the current speed onds. and activate the warning. 30 The essentials

● To switch system on: adjust to the desired Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately speed within 5 seconds using the rocker ● Enter the submenu Driving data and after it appears, press any button on the  switch on the windscreen wiper lever or turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera- windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc- ture display appears. ing wheel*. tion steering wheel. Next, press the button  or  again or wait several seconds. Note The speed is stored and the warning activa- Additional electrical appliances ● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af- ted. ter you switch the ignition on again. ● To switch system off: press the but- ● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*: ● The saving tips do not appear in all situa- ton  or  . The stored speed is de- Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 36 2 until the tions, but rather with a large separation of leted. main menu appears. Enter into the section time. Driving data. With the rocker switch, move to the display Convenience con- Engine oil temperature display sumers. Timer* ● Operation with the multi-function steering The engine reaches its operating temperature wheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 to You can access the timer via the selection when in normal driving conditions, the oil Driving data and enter with OK. Turn the menu ››› page 27. temperature is between 80°C (178°F) and thumbwheel to the right until the Conven- It allows you to manually time lap times on a 120°C (248°F). If the engine is required to ience consumers display appears. work hard and the outside temperature is racing circuit, memorise them and compare high, the engine oil temperature can in- In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur- them to the vehicle's previous best times. crease. This does not present any problem as rent sum of all the additional appliances. The following menus can be displayed: long as the warning lamps  ››› table on page 36 or  ››› table on page 36 do not ● Stop appear on the display. Saving tips ● Lap ● Pause Vehicles without multifunction steering Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in ● Partial time wheel conditions that increase fuel consumption. ● Statistics ● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 36 2 until Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi- » the main menu appears. Enter into Driving cations appear automatically only with the ef- data. With the button 2 move to the oil ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will temperature gauge. disappear automatically.

31 The essentials

Change from one menu to another Menu “Lap” Menu “Long-term Statistics” ● Vehicles without multifunction steering The current lap timer will be interrup- View of the latest lap times: wheel: press the rocker switch  in the Stop ted. The lap does not end. The Pause – total time windscreen wiper lever. menu is displayed. – best lap time ● Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: – worst lap time press  or  . – average lap duration Menu “Pause” A maximum of 10 laps is possible, and a total duration of 99 hours, 59 mi- Continue The interrupted timer continues. Menu “Stop” nutes and 59 seconds. A new timer starts. The halted lap ends If one of the 2 limits is reached, you The timer starts. New lap and is included in the statistics. will have to reset the statistics in order If there are existing laps and they are to begin a new timer. included in the statistics, it will begin The timer of the current lap ends and is Start with the number of laps in question. Interr. cancelled. It is not included in the sta- Back This returns to the previous menu. It is only possible to begin with a new lap tistics. first lap if the statistics have been re- Resetting All the memorised statistical data are set first in the Statistics menu. The current timer ends. The lap is in- to zero reset. End cluded in the statistics. The timer begins when the vehicle sets off. WARNING Since If the vehicle is already moving, the start Menu “Partial time” Do your best to avoid handling the timer timer begins once the vehicle has while driving. stopped. For about 5 seconds a partial time is Partial displayed. The timer continues in par- ● Only set the timer or consult statistics The Statistics menu is displayed time Statistics allel. when the vehicle is stationary. on the screen. ● The timer of the current lap stops and a While driving, do not handle the timer in new lap starts immediately. The time complicated driving situations. New lap Menu “Lap” for the lap you have just completed is included in the statistics. The timer of the current lap stops and a new lap starts immediately. The time New lap The current lap timer will be interrup- Speed warning device for the lap you have just completed is Stop ted. The lap does not end. The Pause included in the statistics. menu is displayed. The speed warning device warns the driver For about 5 seconds a partial time is when they have exceeded the pre-set speed Partial displayed. The timer continues in par- limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning time allel. signal sounds, and the warning lamp  and the driver message Speed limit exceeded! will be displayed simultaneously on the 32 The essentials instrument panel. The warning lamp  of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set until 500 km after the last service. Prior to switches off when reducing speed below the speed limit. this, only lines are visible on the display. stored maximum limit. Speed warning programming is recommen- Inspection reminder ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi- Service intervals When the Service date is approaching, when mum speed, such as when travelling in a the ignition is switched on a Service remind- country with different speed limits or for a The service interval indication appears on the er is displayed. maximum speed for winter tyres. instrument panel display  Fig. 113 3 . ››› Vehicles without text messages: a span- SEAT distinguishes between services with en- ner  will be displayed on the instrument Setting speed limit warning gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and panel plus an indication in km. You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to services without engine oil change (e.g. In- The kilometres indicated are the maximum set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning. spection). number of kilometres that can be travelled ● Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP In vehicles with Services established by time until the next service. After a few seconds, > control button  Driver Assistant > or mileage, the service intervals are already the display mode changes. A clock symbol Speed warning. pre-defined. appears and the number of days until the next service is due. ● Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but- In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- ton Systems or else Vehicle systems > vals are determined individually. Thanks to Vehicles with text messages: Service in Driver assistant > Speed warning. technological progress, maintenance work --- km or --- days will be shown on the has been greatly reduced. Because of the instrument panel display. The warning limit can be set from 30 to technology used by SEAT, with this service 240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment you only need to change the oil when the ve- Service due is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals. hicle so requires. To calculate this change When the service date is due, an audible (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of Note warning is given when the ignition is switch- use and individual driving styles are consid- ed on and the spanner displayed on the ● Please bear in mind that, even with the ered. The advance warning first appears 20 screen flashes for a few seconds . speed warning function, it is still important days before the date established for the cor- to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the responding service. The kilometres (miles) Vehicles with text messages: Service now speedometer and to observe the legal speed remaining until the next service are always will be shown on the instrument panel dis- limits. rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) play. » ● The speed limit warning function in the ver- and the time is given in complete days. The sion for some countries warns you at a speed current service message cannot be viewed

33 The essentials

Reading a service notification OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper ● Switching on the CCS: Move switch  With the ignition switched on, the engine off lever, or OK on the multifunction steering ››› Fig. 40 1 to . The system is on. If no and the vehicle at a standstill, the current wheel. speed has been programmed, the system will service notification can be read: ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in not control it. which the battery has been disconnected for ● Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 40 Press and hold the button 4 for more than 5 a long period of time, it is not possible to cal- 2 in the  area. The current speed is seconds to consult the service message. culate the date of the next service. Therefore memorised and controlled. the service interval display may not be cor- When the service date has passed, a minus ● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum sign is displayed in front of the number of kil- switch ››› Fig. 40 1 to  or push the ometres or days. service intervals permitted in the ››› Book- let Maintenance Programme. brake. The cruise control system is switched Vehicles with text messages: the following off temporarily. message is displayed: Service --- km ● Reactivating the CCS: Press button (miles) or --- days ago. ››› Fig. 40 2 in . The memorised speed Cruise control The time can also be set via the  key and is saved and controlled again. Setup function button in the Easy Connect ● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula- system ›››  page 99. Operating the cruise control system tion: press button 2 in . The vehicle ac- (CCS)* celerates until the new stored speed. Resetting service interval display ● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula- If the service was not carried out by a SEAT tion: press button 2 in  to lower the dealership, the display can be reset as fol- speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced lows: until reaching the new stored speed. ● Switching off the CCS: Move switch ● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but- ››› Fig. 40 1 to . The system is disconnec- ton ›››  Fig. 113 4 . ted and the memorised speed is deleted. ● Switch ignition back on. ● Release the 4 ›››  Fig. 113 button and ››› in Operation on page 181 press it again for the next 20 seconds.  Fig. 40 Turn signal and main beam headlight ››› page 180 Note lever: switches and controls for operating the  ● The service message disappears after a few CCS seconds, when the engine is started or when

34 The essentials

Warning lamps

On the instrument panel

Fig. 41 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Red warning lamps Lit up or flashing: Yellow warning lamps ››› page  Do not continue driving! Central warning lamp: additional  145 Central warning lamp: additional Fault in the steering.  information on the instrument pan- –  information on the instrument pan- – » el display Driver or passenger has not fas- ››› page el display  tened seat belt. 62 Parking brake on.  ››› page 149  Use the foot brake!  Do not continue driving! ››› page The brake fluid level is too low or  150 there is a fault in the brake system. 35 The essentials

 Front brake pads worn. Other warning lamps On the instrument panel display ››› page it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis- Left or right turn signal. 22  connection caused by the system.  ››› page ››› page flashes: ESC or ASR activated. Hazard warning lights on. 152 121 ASR manually deactivated.  ››› page Or else: ESC in Sport mode. Trailer turn signals  183 ABS faulty or does not work.  it lights up: Press the foot brake! ››› page ››› page  flashes: the selector lever locking Front fog lights switched on. 158  21 button has not engaged.

››› page it lights up: cruise control activated Rear fog light switched on.  21 or speed limiter switched on and  active. ››› page lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page 34  emission control system. 168 flashes: the speed set by the speed limiter has been exceeded. it lights up: pre-heating of diesel ››› page Fig. 42 On the instrument panel display: door engine.  Main beam on or flasher on.  ››› page 22 open. flashes: fault in the diesel engine 168 management. ››› page  Do not continue driving! 106 With the corresponding indica- fault in the petrol engine manage- ››› page ››› page 9   tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet ment. 168 ››› page open or not properly closed. 198  lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page steering system. 145 Ignition:  Do not carry on driving! Engine coolant level too low, Tyre pressure too low, or fault in ››› page coolant temperature too high ››› page the tyre pressure monitoring sys-   213 204 tem. Flashing: Fault in the engine coolant system. ››› page  Fuel tank almost empty. 98  Do not continue driving! ››› page  Engine oil pressure too low. 201 Fault in airbag system and seat ››› page  belt tensioners. 66 36 The essentials

››› page Start-Stop system activated. Fault in the battery.  ››› page Gearbox lever  207 170 . Start-Stop system unavailable. Driving light totally or partially ››› page Manual gearbox faulty. 83 ››› page Low consumption driving status   27 Fault in the cornering light sys- ››› page tem. 117

››› page Diesel particulate filter blocked On the instrument panel  167

Level of windscreen washer fluid ››› page  too low. 207

Flashing: Fault in the oil level detection. Control manually. ››› page  201 Ignition: Insufficient engine oil. Fig. 44 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox ››› page Fault in the gearbox.  163 The position of the gears is indicated on the ››› page gearbox lever ››› Fig. 44. Immobiliser active.  147 Fig. 43 Warning lamp for disabling the front ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot ››› page passenger airbag. Service interval display right down.  33 ● Move the gearbox lever to the required po- Front passenger front airbag is Mobile telephone is connected ››› Book- sition.    ››› page via Bluetooth to the original tele- let Radio   disabled (  66 ● phone device. or  ). Release the clutch. ››› Book- Mobile telephone battery charge let Navi- Selecting reverse gear  meter. Available only for devices gation ››› in Warning symbols on page 99  ● pre-installed in factory. system Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. Freezing warning. The outside ››› page 98 ››› page  ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it temperature is lower than +4°C  27 (+39°F). upwards, move it to the left as far as it will go and then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 44 R . » 37 The essentials

● Release the clutch. N Neutral (idling) If there is a fault in the power system to the D Drive (forward) electronic selector lever lock system (flat bat- ››› in Driving with manual gearbox on tery, blown fuse) or the system itself is faulty, Sport programme: drive (forward)  page 158 S the selector lever cannot be moved from po- +/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards sition P in the normal manner, which pre-  ››› page 158 (+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to vents the vehicle from being moved. The se- go down a gear. lector lever must be unlocked using the manual release.

Automatic gearbox*  ››› page 158 ● Apply the handbrake. ● Pull gently on both sides at the front of the  ››› page 38 selector lever cover. ● Also loosen the cover at the rear. ● Press the yellow plastic part with your fin- Manual release of selector lever ger in the direction indicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 46. ● Press the interlock button on the selector lever knob at the same time and move the selector lever to position N (if the selector lever is moved back to position P, it will lock Fig. 45 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po- again). sitions.

P Parking lock R Reverse gear

Fig. 46 Manual release of the selector lever.

38 The essentials

Air conditioning

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 47 In the centre console: Climatronic controls

Buttons/controls Buttons/controls ››› in General notes on page 137 1 Interior temperature setting 10 Set blower speed  11 Interior temperature sensors Display ››› page 143 12 Defrost or demist windscreen  2 Selected interior temperature 13 Automatic mode 3 Degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit 14 Air distribution to windows 4 Automatic air conditioning mode 15 Air distribution to upper body 5 Defrost or demist windscreen 16 Air distribution to footwells 6 Air flow direction 17 Air recirculation 7 Air recirculation 18 Air conditioning on/off 8 Air conditioning on/off 9 Selected blower speed

39 The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning  – Air distribution to the windscreen ››› in General notes on page 137 work*?  and the footwell. D Air recirculation  ››› page 141  ››› in General notes on page 137

How does the heating and the fresh ››› page 139 air system work? 

Fluid Level control

Fig. 48 In the centre console: Manual air conditioning controls Filling capacities

A Temperature Capacities

B Blower Fuel tank 45 litres. 7 litre re- C Air distribution serve.  – Air distribution towards the wind- Fig. 49 In the centre console: heating system Windscreen washer fluid con- 3 litres screen in order to demist or defrost. and fresh air controls. tainer in vehicles without headlight washer – Air distribution to upper body.  A Temperature Windscreen washer fluid con- 4.5 litres  – Air distribution to footwell B Blower tainer in vehicles with headlight washer Air distribution  – Air distribution to the windscreen C and the footwell.  – Air distribution towards the wind- D Air recirculation screen in order to demist or defrost. E A/C: Switching the cooling system on  – Air distribution to upper body.  – Air distribution to footwell

40 The essentials

Fuel ● Remove the key and close the flap until it clicks into place. The tank cap is secured with an anti-loss attachment.

 ››› in Refuelling on page 196  ››› page 196

Oil Fig. 52 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap Fig. 50 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached. The level is measured using the dipstick loca- The tank flap is released manually and is lo- ted in the engine compartment cated at the rear of the vehicle on the right. ›››  page 201. The tank holds approximately 45 litres. The oil should leave a mark between zones A and C . It should never exceed zone A . Opening the fuel tank cap ● Lift the lid. ● Zone A : Do not add oil. ● Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then in- ● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level sert the key into the lock and rotate 180° to in that zone. the left. Fig. 51 Engine oil dipstick. ● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B . ● Unscrew the cap, turning it anticlockwise. Topping up engine oil Closing the fuel tank cap ● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening. ● Screw the tank cap to the right until it ● Add oil slowly. “clicks”. ● At the same time, check the level to ensure ● Turn the key in the lock, without releasing you do not add too much. the cap, clockwise through 180°. ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B , unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully. »

41 The essentials

Oil properties Coolant even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is not required. Engine type Specification If for weather reasons further protection is Petrol without flexible serv- VW 502 00/VW 504 00 necessary, the proportion of additive may be ice interval increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- Petrol with flexible service VW 504 00 tifreeze protection will diminish and this will interval (LongLife) worsen cooling.

Diesel. Engines without Par- VW 505 01/VW 506 When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture ticulate filter (DPF) 01/VW 507 00 of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive Diesel. Particulate Filter En- VW 507 00 (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti- gines (DPF). corrosion protection in Topping up cool- With or without flexible Fig. 53 Engine compartment: coolant expan- ››› service interval (with and sion tank cap. ant on page 206. The mixture of G13 with without LongLife)a) G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significant- a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the The coolant tank is located in the engine engine. compartment ›››  page 201. ly reduce anti-corrosion protection and should therefore be avoided ››› in Topping When the engine is cold, replace the coolant up coolant on page 206. Engine oil additives when the level is below . No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these Coolant specifications  ››› in Topping up coolant on page 205 additives is not covered by the warranty. The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of  ››› page 204  ››› in Changing engine oil on page 204 water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25°C ››› page 201  (-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably rai- ses the boiling point of the coolant. To protect the cooling system, the percentage of additive must always be at least 40 %,

42 The essentials

Brake fluid Windscreen washer maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service.

››› in Symbols and warnings on han-  dling the battery on page 208  ››› page 207

Fig. 54 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: wind- ervoir cap screen washer reservoir top.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- The windscreen washer reservoir is located in gine compartment ›››  page 201. the engine compartment ›››  page 201. The level should be between the  and  To top up, mix water with a product recom- marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni- mended by SEAT. cal Service. In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for windows. ››› in Changing the brake fluid on  page 207 ››› in Topping up the windscreen wash-  er reservoir water on page 207  ››› page 206  ››› page 207

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 201. It does not require 43 The essentials

Emergencies Opening and closing the fuse box situated Colour Amp rating below the dash panel Green 30 Fuses ● Opening: remove the fuse box cover ››› Fig. 56. Orange 40 Fuse location ● Closing: click the cover back into place. ››› in Introduction on page 80 To open the engine compartment fuse box  ● Raise the bonnet. ››› page 80 ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse  box cover ››› Fig. 57 ● Then lift the cover out. ● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Replacing a blown fuse Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.

Fig. 56 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse Identifying fuses situated below the dash box cover panel by colours Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5 Fig. 58 Image of a blown fuse Brown 7.5 Preparation Red 10 ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec- Blue 15 trical equipment.

Fig. 57 In the engine compartment: fuse box Yellow 20 ● Open the corresponding fuse box cover ›››  page 81. White or transparent 25

44 The essentials

Identifying a blown fuse Double headlights Type Action in the event of a punc- A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured a) ture ››› Fig. 58. DRL (day light) LED a) In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have ● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has it replaced. What to do first blown. ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface Single headlight Type To replace a fuse and in a safe place as far away from traffic as Dipped/main beam headlights H4 Long Life possible. ● Remove the fuse. ● Apply the handbrake. ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an Side lights W5W Long Life ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. identical amperage rating (same colour and Turn signal PY 21W markings) and identical size. ● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear. DRL (day light) P21W SLL ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse ● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever box lid. to position P. Xenon/adaptive head- Type ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from lights* your vehicle. Bulbs Dipped/main beam headlights D1Sa) ● Have the vehicle tool kit* ››› page 47 and Side lights LEDb) the spare wheel ›››  page 75 ready. Bulbs (12 V) ● Observe the applicable legislation for each Turn signal PY 21W country (reflective vest, warning triangles, DRL (day light) LEDb) etc.). Light source used for each function ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and a) This light should be changed by an Authorised Service. Double headlights Type wait in a safe place (for instance behind the b) In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life it replaced. roadside crash barrier).

Main beam headlights H7 WARNING ››› page 83 Side lights W5W Long Life  ● Always observe the above steps and protect yourself and other road users. Turn signal PY 21W ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from moving. 45 The essentials

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● Remove the lid from the filling tube ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the ture kit ››› Fig. 59 3 and screw the open end of the valve. tube into the tyre valve. ● Repeat the inflation process. ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop bottle. and request assistance from an authorised ● Remove the bottle from the valve. technician. ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew ing the tool ››› Fig. 59 1 . the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and Inflating the tyre 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube 80 km/h (50 mph). ››› Fig. 59 5 into the tyre valve. ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed ›››  page 78. Fig. 59 Standard representation: contents of ››› Fig. 59 7 . the anti-puncture kit. ● Start the engine and leave it running. ››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on  page 76 ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 59 9 into the The anti-puncture kit is located under the vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 133. floor panel in the luggage compartment.  ››› page 76 ● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF Sealing the tyre switch ››› Fig. 59 8 . ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use ● Keep the air compressor running until it reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar the ››› Fig. 59 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface. (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes. ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● Disconnect the air compressor. ››› Fig. 59 10 . ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 59 3 into the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. automatically. ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre.

46 The essentials

Changing a wheel Wheel covers* Wheel bolt caps*

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 61 Remove the wheel cover. Fig. 62 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

The wheel covers must be removed for access Removal Fig. 60 Underneath the floor panel of the luggage compartment: vehicle tool kit. to the wheel bolts. ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 62. Removing 1 An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. 2 Towline anchorage ● Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook ››› Fig. 61. 3 Box spanner for wheel bolts* ● Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the 4 Jack* wheel cover. 5 Wire hook for pulling off the wheel covers*/wheel bolt cap clip. Fitting ● Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by  ››› in Vehicle tools on page 75 pressing it firmly. ● Put pressure on the point of the cut-out for  ››› page 75 the valve. ● Next fit the rest of the wheel cover

47 The essentials

Anti-theft wheel bolts* Loosening the wheel bolts Raising the vehicle

Fig. 63 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and Fig. 64 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts. Fig. 65 Jack position points adapter. ● Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) onto A special adapter (vehicle tools) is required the wheel bolt as far as it will go. An adapter to remove the anti-theft wheel bolts. is required to unscrew or tighten the anti- theft wheel bolts ››› page 48. ● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*. ● Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn ● Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools) to the left ››› Fig. 64 (arrow). To apply the re- onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on quired torque, hold the wheel brace at the as far as it will go. end. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel ● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto bolt, carefully apply pressure with one foot the adapter as far as it will go. on the end of the box spanner. Hold on to the ● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 48. vehicle for support and take care not to slip. Fig. 66 Fitting the jack.

Note WARNING ● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be- ground. If necessary use a large, strong Make a note of the code number of the anti- board or similar support. If the surface is slip- theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place, fore raising the vehicle with the jack*. If not, pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a but not in your vehicle. If you need a new an accident may occur. adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi- rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- cial Service, indicating the code number. ping ››› .

48 The essentials

● Find the support point on the strut (sunken CAUTION ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- area) closest to the wheel to be changed ting the wheel. ››› Fig. 65. The vehicle must not be raised on the cross- bar. Only place the jack* on the points de- CAUTION ● Place the jack under the jacking point and signed for this purpose on the strut. Other- turn the crank until the arm of the jack is di- wise, the vehicle may be damaged. When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim rectly below the vertical rib under the door may hit and damage the brake disc. For this sill. reason, please take care and get a second person to assist you. ● Align the jack so that the arm of the jack Removing and fitting the wheel fits around the rib under the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat on the Change the wheel after loosening the wheel ground ››› Fig. 66. bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack. Tyres with compulsory rotation direc- ● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel tion is slightly lifted off the ground. Taking off the wheel A directional tread pattern can be identified ● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box by the arrows on the sidewall that point in WARNING spanner and place them on a clean surface. the direction of rotation. Always observe the ● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If ● Take off the wheel ››› . direction of rotation indicated when fitting the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could the wheel to guarantee optimum properties slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant Putting on the spare wheel of this type of tyres with regard to grip, risk of injury. When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation noises, wear and aquaplaning. ● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* supplied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles direction, observe the instructions in If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare could slip, with the consequent risk of injury. ››› page 49. tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive with care as this means the tyre does not of- ● Only mount the jack* on the support points ● Mount the wheel. designed for this purpose on the strut, and fer optimum driving properties. This is of par- ● always align the jack correctly. If you do not, Screw on the wheel bolts in position and ticular importance when the road surface is the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad- tighten them loosely with a box spanner. wet. equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury! ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. To return to directional tread tires, replace ● The height of the parked vehicle can ● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs the punctured tyre as soon as possible and change as a result of variations in tempera- using the wheel brace. restore the obligatory direction of rotation of ture and loading. all tyres. The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- 49 The essentials

Subsequent work necessary, in accordance with the manufac- tions. This will prevent the chains coming in- turer's fitting instructions. to contact with the wheel housing. ● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. ● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). ● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap. ● If there is a danger of being trapped de- ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca- spite having mounted the chains, it is best to tion. disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the ›››  page 152. spare wheel housing, store it safely in the Snow chains will improve braking ability as luggage compartment  page 133. ››› well as traction in winter conditions. ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly mounted tyre as soon as possible. For technical reasons snow chains may only be used with the following wheel rim/tyre ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- combination. cator, adjust the pressure and store it in memory ›››  page 213. 175/70R14 Chains with links not exceeding 15 mm ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel 185/60R15 (including the chain closure) bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- 215/45R16 Chains with links not exceeding 9 mm que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean- (including the chain closure) while, drive carefully. 215/40R17 Chains with links not exceeding 7 mm ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as (including the chain closure) possible. Remove wheel covers and any integral trim ring before fitting snow chains. Snow chains Remove the chains when roads are free of snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the Use wheels become damaged quickly and may even be rendered unusable. Snow chains should only be used on the front wheels. WARNING

● Check that they are correctly seated after Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc- driving for a few yards; correct the position if

50 The essentials

Emergency towing of the vehi- Towline anchorages Driving style cle Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- Towing requires some experience, especially rages. when using a tow rope. Both drivers should realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In- The towline anchorages are located under Towing experienced drivers should not attempt to the floor panel in the luggage compartment, tow. next to the vehicle tools ››› page 47. Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle Screw the front towline anchorage into the and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. screw connection ››› Fig. 67 and tighten it When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- with the wheel brace. The rear towline an- ways a risk of overloading and damaging the chorage is under the rear bumper, on the anchorage points. right. The ignition of the vehicle being towed must Tow rope or tow bar be switched on to prevent the steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow- turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and ed using a tow bar. You should only use a Fig. 67 Right side of the front bumper: Tow- washers. ing ring. tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar. Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re- with a manual gearbox. With an automatic duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis- gearbox, place the lever in . able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi- N bre or similarly elastic material. The brake servo only works when the engine is running. When not running, you must ap- Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the ply considerably more pressure to the brake towline anchorages provided or a towing pedal. bracket. As the power assisted steering does not work Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle if the engine is not running, you will need ● The tow rope must be taut before you drive more strength to steer than you normally would. » Fig. 68 Right side of the rear bumper: Towing off. ring. ● Release the clutch very carefully when starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or accelerate gently (automatic gearbox).

51 The essentials

How to jump start: description  ››› in Notes on page 79  ››› in Notes on page 79  ››› page 79  ››› page 79

Tow-starting How to jump start If the engine will not start, first try starting it using the battery of another vehicle Jump leads ››› page 52. You should only attempt to tow- start a vehicle if charging the battery does The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section. Fig. 69 Diagram of connections for vehicles not work. This is done by leveraging wheel without Start-Stop system. movement. If the engine fails to start because of a dis- When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en- charged battery, the battery can be connec- gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the the engine. catalytic converter. Jump leads However, if your vehicle has to be tow-star- Jump leads must comply with standard DIN ted: 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- ● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear. tions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least ● Keep the clutch pressed down. 35 mm2 for diesel engines. ● Switch the ignition on. Fig. 70 Diagram of connections for vehicles ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the Note with Start-Stop system. clutch. ● The vehicles must not touch each other, Jump lead terminal connections ● As soon as the engine starts, press the otherwise electricity could flow as soon as clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. the positive terminals are connected. 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles This helps to prevent driving into the towing ● The discharged battery must be properly ››› . vehicle. connected to the on-board network.

52 The essentials

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat imprint on battery). Failure to comply could the positive + terminal of the vehicle battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until result in an explosion. with the flat battery A Fig. 69. the engine is running. ››› ● Never use jump leads when one of the bat- 3. Connect the other end of the red jump teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af- Removing the jump leads lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could hicle providing assistance B . 9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery off the dipped beam headlights if they are freezes, it should be replaced. 4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: switched on. ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes connect one end of the black jump lead to away from batteries, danger of explosion. the negative terminal – of the vehicle 10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear Failure to comply could result in an explo- providing the current B ››› Fig. 69. window in the vehicle with the flat battery. sion. This helps minimise voltage peaks which – For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con- ● Observe the instructions provided by the are generated when the leads are disconnect one end of the black jump lead X to a manufacturer of the jump leads. nected. suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of ● Do not connect the negative cable from the metal in the engine block, or to the engine 11.When the engine is running, disconnect other vehicle directly to the negative terminal block itself ››› Fig. 70. the leads in reverse order to the details of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the given above. battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of 5. Connect the other end of the black jump explosion. lead X to a solid metal component bolted Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● to the engine block or to the engine block Do not attach the negative cable from the metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. nals. the brake line. Do not connect it to a point near the bat- ● tery A . If the engine fails to start, switch off the start- The non-insulated parts of the battery er after about 10 seconds and try again after clamps must not be allowed to touch. The 6. Position the leads in such a way that they about a minute. jump lead attached to the positive battery cannot come into contact with any moving terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve- parts in the engine compartment. WARNING hicle, this can cause a short circuit. ● Position the leads in such a way that they ● Please note the safety warnings referring to Starting cannot come into contact with any moving working in the engine compartment parts in the engine compartment. 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the ›››  page 198, Working in the engine boosting battery and let it run at idling compartment. ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns. » speed. ● The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V) and approximately the same capacity (see

53 The essentials

Note ● Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

The vehicles must not touch each other, oth- Fitting the wiper blade erwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. ● Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen wiper arm until it clicks into place. ● Place the windscreen wiper arms to their in- Changing the windscreen wiper itial position. blades ››› in Changing the windscreen and  rear window wiper blades on page 78 Fig. 72 Changing the windscreen wiper Changing the wiper blades blade.  ››› page 78 To change the blades it is necessary to move the wipers from the rest position into the service position. Changing the rear window wiper blade Do not change the windscreen wipers when out of the service position, as it could cause paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction with the windscreen wiper arm.

Service position (for changing wiper blades) Fig. 71 Wipers in service position ● Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. ● Turn the ignition on and off and then (within approximately 9 seconds) push the windscreen wiper lever down (short wipe). The windscreen wipers will move to the service Fig. 73 Removing and fitting the rear window position ››› Fig. 71. wiper blade.

Removing the wiper blade Removing the wiper blade ● Lift the windscreen wiper arm. ● Lift the wiper arm away from the glass ● Press the securing tab down 1 ››› Fig. 72. 54 The essentials

● Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 73 A.

Fitting the wiper blade ● With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm. ● Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 73 B and slide the adapter along until it engages.

››› in Changing the windscreen and  rear window wiper blades on page 78  ››› page 78

55 Safety

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn What affects driving safety? Safety signals are working properly. As a driver, you are responsible for yourself – Check tyre pressure. Safe driving and your passengers. When your concentra- – Ensure that all windows provide a clear and tion or driving safety is affected by any cir- Safety first! good view of the surroundings. cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road , for this reason: – Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured ››› This chapter contains important information, ››› page 133. – Always pay attention to traffic and do not tips, suggestions and warnings that you get distracted by passengers or telephone – Make sure that no objects can interfere should read and consider for both your own calls. safety and for your passengers' safety. with the pedals. – Never drive when your driving ability is im- – Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). WARNING rors properly according to your size. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. ● This manual contains important informa- – Ensure that the passenger in the central tion about the operation of the vehicle, both rear seat always has the head restraint in – Always reduce your speed as appropriate for the driver and the passengers. The other the correct position for use. for road, traffic and weather conditions. sections of the on-board documentation also contain further information that you should – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- – When travelling long distances, take be aware of for your own safety and for the straints according to their height. breaks regularly - at least every two hours. safety of your passengers. – Protect children with appropriate child – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired ● Ensure that the on-board documentation is seats and properly applied seat belts or stressed. kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe- ››› page 72. cially important when lending or selling the WARNING vehicle to another person. – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper When driving safety is impaired during a trip, sitting position ››› page 57. the risk of injury and accidents increases. Advice about driving – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts Safety equipment Before setting off properly ››› page 61. Never put your safety or the safety of your For your own safety and the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- passengers, always note the following points dent, the safety equipment may reduce the before every trip: 56 Safe driving risk of injury. The following list includes most Correct position for passengers mend the following adjustments for the driv- of the safety equipment in your SEAT: er:

● Three-point seat belts Correct sitting position for driver – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the ● Belt tension limiter for the front and rear steering wheel and the centre of your chest side seats data Technical ››› Fig. 74. ● Belt tensioners for the front seats – Move the driver's seat forwards or back- ● Front airbags wards so that you are able to press the ac- ● Side airbags in the front seat backrests, celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the

with chest and head protection floor with your knees still slightly angled Advice ● “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear ››› . child seat system – Ensure that you can reach the highest point ● Height-adjustable front head restraints of the steering wheel. ● Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po- Fig. 74 The proper distance between driver – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper sition and non-use position and steering wheel edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same ● Adjustable steering column Operation level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 75. The safety equipment mentioned above – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- works together to provide you and your pas- tion so that your back rests completely sengers with the best possible protection in against it. the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61. and your passengers are sitting in a correct – Keep both feet in the footwell so that you Emergencies position and use this equipment properly. have the vehicle under control at all times. Safety is everyone's business! Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 127. Fig. 75 Correct head restraint position for the driver. WARNING Safety ● An incorrect sitting position of the driver For your own safety and to reduce the risk of can lead to severe injuries. » injury in the event of an accident, we recom-

57 Safety

● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at Adjusting the steering wheel position – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- least 25 cm distance between the centre of tion so that your back rests completely the chest and the centre of the steering Read the additional information carefully against it. wheel Fig. 74. If distance is less than 25 ›››  page 13 ››› – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper cm, the airbag system may not protect you edge is at the same level as the top of your properly. WARNING head, or as close as possible to the same ● If your physical constitution prevents you ● Never adjust the position of the steering level as the top of your head ››› page 60. from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this cm, contact a specialised workshop. The could cause an accident. – Always keep both feet in the footwell in workshop will help you decide if special spe- front of the front passenger seat. ● Move the lever up firmly so the steering cific modifications are necessary. wheel position does not accidentally change – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61. ● When driving, always hold the steering during driving. risk of accident! wheel with both hands on the outside of the ● Make sure you are capable of reaching and It is possible to deactivate the front passen- ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. firmly holding the upper part of the steering ger airbag in exceptional circumstances This reduces the risk of injury when the driver wheel: risk of accident! ››› page 70. airbag is triggered. ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it Adjusting the front passenger seat ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 points towards your face, the driver airbag o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. ›››  page 12. will not protect you properly in the event of in the centre of the steering wheel). In such an accident. Make sure that the steering cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus- WARNING wheel points towards your chest. tain injuries to the arms, hands and head. ● An incorrect sitting position of the front ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver passenger can lead to severe injuries. during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac- ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far Correct sitting position for front pas- there is at least 25 cm between your chest back! The airbag system and seat belts can senger and the dash panel. If distance is less than only provide optimal protection when the 25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you backrest is in an upright position and the For your own safety and to reduce the risk of properly. driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct- injury in the event of an accident, we recom- ● If your physical constitution prevents you ly. mend the following adjustments for the front from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 ● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- passenger: cm, contact a specialised workshop. The ieve optimal protection. – Move the front passenger seat back as far workshop will help you decide if special spe- as possible ››› . cific modifications are necessary.

58 Safe driving

● Always keep your feet in the footwell when – Always keep both feet in the footwell in – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the front of the rear seat. sitting position in the vehicle while travelling ››› . dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61. incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden – Use an appropriate child restraint system The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dangerous for all braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- when you take children in the vehicle data Technical gered, you could sustain severe injuries due ››› page 72. vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, to an incorrect sitting position. but we would like to make you aware of this ● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas- WARNING issue. senger in events such as sudden braking ma- ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion: noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the sitting properly, they could sustain severe in- Advice backrest tilted far back! The airbag system juries. ● Never stand in the vehicle. and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright po- ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order ● Never stand on the seats. sition and the front passenger is wearing his to achieve maximum protection. ● Never kneel on the seats. or her seat belt properly. The further the seat ● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec- ● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear. backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater tion when seat backrests are in an upright the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning position and the vehicle occupants are wear- ● Never lean against the dash panel. of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po- ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In ● Never lie on the rear bench. Operation sition! the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po- ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- to achieve maximum protection. tioning of the seat belt increases. ● Never sit sideways. ● Never lean out of a window. ● Never put your feet out of a window. Correct sitting position for rear seat Examples of incorrect sitting posi- ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. Emergencies passengers tions ● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat. To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot- sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, ly when the belt webs are properly posi- well. tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- passengers on the rear seat bench must con- ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. sider the following: tially reduce the protective function of seat Safety belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug- – Sit up straight. correct seat belt position. As the driver, you gage compartment. » – Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- are responsible for all passengers, especially sition ››› page 60. children. 59 Safety

WARNING Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Correct adjustment of rear head re- portant part of passenger protection and can straints ● Any incorrect sitting position increases the reduce the risk of injuries in most accident risk of severe injuries. situations. ● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev- who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi- el as the top of your head, or at the very tion. least, at eye level ››› Fig. 76. ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and maintain it throughout WARNING the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas- ● Travelling with the head restraints removed sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po- or improperly adjusted increases the risk of sition during the trip ››› page 57, Correct posi- severe injuries. An improper adjustment of tion for passengers. the head restraints may cause death in an ac- Fig. 77 Rear head restraint adjustment. cident and increase the risk of suffering injuries during abrupt braking actions or unex- The rear head restraints have 2 positions: pected manoeuvres. Correct adjustment of front head re- ● Raised position or position for use A ● The head restraints must always be adjus- straints . In this position, the head restraint ted according to the height of the passenger. ››› Fig. 77 is used normally, protecting the occupant of the rear seats, along with the rear seat belts. ● Rest position, not in use B ››› Fig. 77. This position improves the driver's rear visibility.

To fit the head restraint in position for use A , pull on the edges with both hands in the direction of the arrow. To place it in rest position B , lower the head restraint.

WARNING Fig. 76 Correctly adjusted head restraint as ● Whenever a passenger is seated on the rear viewed from the front and the side. seats, the head restraint should be placed in the position for use A .

60 Seat belts

● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint Wear suitable footwear Seat belts with either of the outer seat rear head re- Always wear shoes which support your feet straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident! properly and give you a good feeling for the Why wear a seat belt? pedals. Note WARNING Number of seats data Technical Note the instructions on the head restraints adjustment. ● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front may occur. Risk of serious injuries. and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov- with a three-point seat belt. erings over the original floor mats. This Advice Pedal area would reduce the pedal area and could ob- In some versions, your vehicle is approved struct the pedals. Risk of accident. only for four seats. Two front seats and two rear seats. Pedals ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and – Ensure that you can always press the accel- impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud- WARNING erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will ● Never transport more than the permitted to the floor. not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac- amount of people in your vehicle. celerator pedal. Risk of accident! Operation – Ensure that the pedals can return unim- ● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas- paired to their initial positions. ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an – Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- appropriate child restraint system. tened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals Emergencies clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a specialised dealership. If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop Safety the vehicle.

61 Safety

Seat belt lamp* (15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- while the vehicle is in motion. The warning tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- lamp will also flash . gy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic The  lamp goes out when the driver and energy and consequently, the risk of injury. passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig- This is why it is so important to fasten seat nition switched on. belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner". The protective function of seat belts Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury Fig. 78 Warning lamp on the instrument pan- and improving the chances of survival when el. involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec- The control lamp illuminates to remind the tion provided by airbags in the event of an driver to fasten his seat belt. accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt Before starting the vehicle: is required by law in most countries. – Fasten your seat belt securely. Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fastened and – Instruct your passengers to fasten their Fig. 79 Drivers with properly worn seat belts worn. The front airbags, for example, are only seat belts properly before driving off. will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- triggered in some cases of head-on collision. – Protect children by using a child seat ac- den braking The front airbags will not be triggered during cording to the child's height and weight. minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- When the ignition is switched on, the control in the proper position. These also help pre- bag trigger threshold value in the control unit lamp  in the instrument panel lights up* if vent uncontrolled movements that may result is not exceeded. the driver or passenger* have not fastened in serious injury and reduce the risk of being their seat belts. thrown out of the vehicle. Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants An audible warning signal will sound for a Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts have fastened their seat belts properly before few seconds if the seat belts are not fastened correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the you drive off! as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, of more than approximately 25 km/h the front part of your vehicle and other pas- 62 Seat belts

Safety instructions on using seat ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or Head-on collisions and the laws of belts jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. physics ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or – Always wear the seat belt as described in in any other incorrect position. this section. ● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat Technical data Technical – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func- at all times and are not damaged. tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to protect. WARNING ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this

● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at Advice can prevent the latch plate from engaging se- all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The curely. optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly. ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar items to alter the position of the belt Fig. 80 A driver not wearing a seat belt is ● Fasten your seat belt before every trip - webbing. thrown forward violently even when driving in town. Other vehicle occupants must also wear the seat belts at all ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the times, otherwise they run the risk of being in- connections, belt retractors or parts of the jured. buckle could cause severe injuries in the Operation event of an accident. Therefore, you must ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection check the condition of all seat belts at regular if the seat belt is not positioned correctly. intervals. ● Never allow two passengers (even children) ● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci- to share the same seat belt. dent and stretched must be replaced by a ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec-

front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in essary even if there is no apparent damage. Emergencies motion. The belt anchorage should also be checked. ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat Fig. 81 The unbelted passenger in the rear cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the ● The seat belt must never be twisted while it moved or modified in any way. driver who is wearing a seat belt.

is being worn. ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the Safety ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or retractors may not work properly. It is easy to explain how the laws of physics fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) work in the case of a head-on collision: when because this can cause injuries. a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy »

63 Safety

called “kinetic energy” is created both in the Even at low speeds the forces acting on the How to properly adjust your passengers and inside the vehicle. body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. seatbelt The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers the speed of the vehicle and the weight of are thrown forward and will make violent con- Fastening and unfastening the seat the vehicle and its passengers. The higher tact with the steering wheel, dash panel, the speed and the greater the weight, the belt windscreen or whatever else is in the way more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an ››› Fig. 80. accident. It is also important for rear passengers to The most significant factor, however, is the wear seat belts properly, as they could other- speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles wise be thrown forward violently through the from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki- the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- netic energy is multiplied by four. danger not only themselves but also the front Because the vehicle occupants in our exam- occupants ››› Fig. 81. ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the event of crashing against a wall, all of the occupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed solely by said impact. Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher. Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on Fig. 82 Positioning and removing the seat collision, they will move forward at the same belt buckle. speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

64 Seat belts

ing sudden braking, during travel in steep ● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se- areas or bends and during acceleration, the vere injuries in the event of an accident. automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie locked. on the centre of the shoulder, never across The automatic belt retractors on the front the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners comfortably on the torso data Technical ››› page 65. ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The Releasing the seat belt seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to ● Press the red button on the belt buckle take up any slack. Advice ››› Fig. 82. The latch plate is released and ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the springs out . Fig. 83 Position of seat belt during pregnan- ››› seat belt must lie as low as possible over the cy. ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls pelvis, never across the stomach, and always up easily and the trim is not damaged. lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the Fasten your seat belt abdomen ››› Fig. 83. The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if Positioning seat belts ● Always engage the retractor lock when you the seat belt is not positioned correctly. Operation Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 ››› page 72. ● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly. ly when they are properly positioned. ● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 63. ● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch WARNING plate and pull it slowly across your chest and lap. ● The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the Belt pretensioners* and the seat belts have been fastened prop- Emergencies appropriate seat and push it down until it is erly. securely locked with an audible click How the seat belt tensioner works ● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of ››› Fig. 82. another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will Read the additional information carefully ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is not protect you properly and the risk of injury ›››  page 13 securely engaged in the buckle. is increased. Safety ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- The seat belts for the occupants in the front The seat belts are equipped with an automat- cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen- ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free- risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. sors will trigger the belt pretensioners during dom of movement is permitted when the severe head-on, lateral and rear collisions » shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- 65 Safety only if the seat belt is being worn. This re- do not cause any injuries or environmental Airbag system tracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing pollution, regulations, which are known to the forward motion of the occupants. the specialised workshops, must be observed. Brief introduction The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle WARNING Why is it so important to wear a seat overturns, or in accidents where no major forces act on the vehicle. ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by belt and to sit correctly? qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- For the inflating airbags to achieve the best Note vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir- protection, the seat belt must always be worn ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a cumstances. properly and the correct sitting position must fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is ● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or be assumed. not an indication of fire in the vehicle. install parts of the belt tensioners or seat The airbag system is not a substitute for seat ● The relevant safety requirements must be belts. observed when the vehicle or components of belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto- the system are scrapped. Specialised work- overall passive safety system. Please bear in matic retractor cannot be repaired. shops are familiar with these regulations, mind that the airbag system can only work ef- which are also available to you. ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat fectively when the vehicle occupants are belts, including the removal and refitting of wearing their seat belts correctly and have system parts in conjunction with other repair adjusted the head restraints properly. There- work, must be performed by a specialised Service and disposal of belt tension- fore, it is most important to properly wear the workshop only. seat belts at all times, not only because this ers ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- is required by law in most countries, but also tection for one accident and must be changed for your safety ››› page 61, Why wear a seat The belt tensioners are components of the if they have been activated. belt?. seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so ers or remove and install parts of the system if you are not properly seated when the air- when performing other repair work, the seat bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- belt may be damaged. The consequence may ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle be that, in the event of an accident, the belt occupants assume a correct sitting position tensioners function incorrectly or may not while travelling. function at all. Sharp braking before an accident may cause So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be sioner is not reduced and that removed parts thrown forward into the area of the deploying 66 Airbag system airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil- The airbag system operation is monitored inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu- dren in the vehicle if they are not restrained electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- pant. This also applies to children. or the restraint system is not appropriate for luminate for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis). Always maintain the greatest possible dis- their age, size or weight. tance between yourself and the front airbag. ● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you This way, the front airbags can completely lean forward or to the side while travelling or There is a fault in the system if the control data Technical  deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- assume an incorrect sitting position, there is lamp : mum protection. a substantially increased risk of injury. This ● does not light up when the ignition is increased risk of injury will be further in- switched on ››› page 68, The most important factors that will trigger creased if you are struck by an inflating air- ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle bag. Advice of collision and the speed of the vehicle. ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating is switched on, ● Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- airbag, always wear the seat belt properly. turns off and then lights up again after the pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration ● Always adjust the front seats properly. ignition is switched on, rate resulting from the collision and detected ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration moving. occurring during the collision and measured Description of airbag system by the control unit remains below the speci- The airbag system is not triggered if: Operation fied reference values, the front, side and/or The airbag system mainly comprises (as per ● the ignition is switched off curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in- vehicle equipment): ● to account that the visible damage in a vehi- there is a minor frontal collision ● an electronic control and monitoring sys- cle involved in an accident, no matter how ● there is a minor side collision tem (control unit) serious, is not a determining factor for the ● there is a rear-end collision airbags to have been triggered. ● frontal airbags for driver and passenger, ●

the vehicle turns over. Emergencies ● side airbags, WARNING ● curtain airbags, WARNING ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum- ● a control lamp  on the dash panel ● The seat belts and airbags can only provide ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to ››› page 68. maximum protection if the occupants are critical or fatal injuries. seated correctly ››› page 57, Correct position ● key-operated switch for front passenger air- Safety ● All vehicle occupants, including children, bag, for passengers. who are not properly belted can sustain criti- ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. ● a control lamp for disabling/enabling the have the system checked immediately by a Children up to 12 years old should always front passenger airbag. specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a » 67 Safety

frontal collision the system might not trigger The control unit analyses the collision trajec- Airbag control lamp and seat belt ten- correctly or may fail to trigger at all. tory and activates the respective restraint sioner  system. If the deceleration rate is below the prede- The control lamp monitors all airbags and Airbag activation fined reference value in the control unit the seat belt tensioners in the vehicle, including airbags will not be triggered, even though control units and wiring connections. The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within the accident may cause extensive damage to thousandths of a second, to provide addi- the car. Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner sys- tional protection in the event of an accident. tem A fine dust may develop when the airbag de- The following airbags are triggered in seri- Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica- ous head-on collisions operation is constantly monitored electroni- tion of fire in the vehicle.  ● Driver airbag. cally. The control lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switch- The airbag system is only ready to function ● Front passenger front airbag when the ignition is on. ed on (self-diagnosis).

In special accidents instances, several air- The following airbags are triggered in seri- The system must be checked when the con- bags may activate at the same time. ous side-on collisions trol lamp  : In the event of minor head-on and side colli- ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- ● does not light up when the ignition is sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- dent. switched on, over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition dent. is switched on Activation factors ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- ● turns off and then lights up again after the The conditions that lead to the airbag system cident. ignition is switched on activating in each situation cannot be gener- ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is alised. Some factors play an important role, In an accident with airbag activation: moving. such as the properties of the object the vehi- ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle light switch is in the courtesy light position); In the event of a malfunction, the warning speed, etc. ● the hazard warning lights switch on; lamp remains on continuously. Have the air- Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- bag system inspected immediately by a spe- ● all doors are unlocked; vation. cialised workshop. ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

68 Airbag system

If any of the airbags are disabled by a Techni- ● The airbags provide protection for just one the doors. This would impair the protection cal Service, the warning lamp flashes for sev- accident; replace them once they have de- offered by the side airbags. eral more seconds after verification and will ployed. ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only turn off if there is no fault. ● It is also important not to attach any ob- for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any jects such as cup holders or telephone heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

WARNING data Technical mountings to the surfaces covering the air- ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, ● If there is a malfunction, the airbag and bag units. must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- belt tensioner system cannot properly per- ● Do not attempt to modify components of ster because the system may be damaged. In form its protective function. the airbag system in any way. this case, the side airbags would not be trig- ● If a malfunction occurs, have the system gered. checked immediately by a specialised work- ● Under no circumstances should protective Advice shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, Side airbags* covers be fitted over seats with side airbags the airbag system and belt tensioners may unless the covers have been approved for use not be triggered, or may not be triggered cor- Read the additional information carefully in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys rectly. ›››  page 15. from the side of the backrest, the use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec- WARNING

tiveness. Operation Airbag safety instructions ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean ● Any damage to the original seat upholstery forward, or are not seated correctly while the or around the seams of the side airbag units Front airbags vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk must be repaired immediately by a special- of injury if the side airbag system is triggered ised workshop. in an accident. Read the additional information carefully ● The airbags provide protection for just one ›››  page 14. ● In order for the side airbags to provide their accident; replace them once they have de- maximum protection, the prescribed sitting ployed. Emergencies position must always be maintained with WARNING ● seat belts fastened while travelling. Any work on the side airbag system or re- ● The seat belts and airbags can only provide moval and installation of the airbag compo- ● maximum protection if the occupants are Occupants of the outer seats must never nents for other repairs (such as removal of seated correctly ››› page 57, Correct position carry any objects or pets in the deployment the front seat) should only be performed by a for passengers. space between them and the airbags, or al- specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may low children or other passengers to travel in occur during the airbag system operation. Safety ● The deployment space between the front this position. It is also important not to at- ● passengers and the airbags must not in any tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to Do not attempt to modify components of case be occupied by other passenger, pets the airbag system in any way. » and objects. 69 Safety

● The side and head airbags are managed WARNING Deactivating airbags through sensors located in the interior of the The airbag is deployed at high speed in frac- front doors. To ensure the correct operation of tions of a second. Deactivation of front passenger front the side and curtain (head) airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be ● Do not obstruct the head-protection airbag airbag* modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak- deployment areas. ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag ● Never secure objects over the curtain air- system may not work correctly. All work car- bag cover or in its deployment area. ried out on the front door must be done in a ● Occupants of the front seats and rear side specialised workshop. seats must never carry any other people, ani- ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will mals or objects in the deployment space be- not work if the sensors do not correctly meas- tween them and the airbags. Make sure that ure the pressure increase on the interior of all the vehicle occupants, including children, the doors, due to air escaping through the observe this. areas with holes or openings in the door pan- ● The clothes hangers are intended only for el. light articles of clothing. Do not leave any ● Never drive if the interior door panels have heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Fig. 84 In the glove compartment: Switch for been removed or if the panels have not been ● Do not mount accessories on the doors. activating and deactivating the front passen- correctly fitted. ger airbag ● Use only sun blinds which have been ex- ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers pressly approved for use in your vehicle. in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have ● Do not turn the sun blinds towards the win- been closed properly. dows if there are objects, e.g. pens or garage remote controls, secured to them. ● Always check that the openings are closed or covered if additional loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted inside the door panels. ● Any work carried out to the doors should be made in an authorised specialised workshop.

Curtain airbags* Fig. 85 Centre side of dash panel: control lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag Read the additional information carefully in centre console ›››  page 15. 70 Airbag system

Read the additional information carefully ● You should deactivate the front passenger an accident. Warn all your passengers of ›››  page 14 front airbag only if you have to use a rear-fac- this. If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front ing child seat in exceptional cases passenger seat, the front passenger front air- ››› page 72, Transporting children safely. bag must be de-activated. ● Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front data Technical When the front passenger airbag is deactiva- passenger front airbag has been disabled. ted, this means that only the front passenger Otherwise, there is a risk of death. front airbag is deactivated. All the other air- ● As soon as the child seat is no longer nee- bags in the vehicle remain activated. ded on the front passenger seat, enable the

front passenger front airbag again. Advice Activating the front passenger front airbag ● Only deactivate the front passenger front – Switch the ignition off. airbag when the ignition is off, otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which – Open the glove compartment on the front could cause the airbag to not deploy properly passenger side. or not deploy at all in case of an accident. – Insert the key into the slot of the switch for ● Never leave the key in the airbag disabling

deactivating the front passenger airbag switch as it could get damaged or enable or Operation ››› Fig. 84. About 3/4 of the key should en- disable the airbag during driving. ter, as far as it will go. ● When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the control lamp      is not – Then turn the key gently to the  position. continuously lit up when the front passenger Do not force it if you feel resistance, and airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the make sure you have inserted the key fully. airbag system:

– When the ignition is switched on, check – Have the airbag system inspected imme- Emergencies whether the control lamp    diately by a specialised workshop.   on the dash panel does ››› Fig. 85 not – Do not use a child seat on the front pas- light up ››› . senger seat! The front passenger front airbag could be triggered in the event of

WARNING an accident, even if there is a fault in the Safety system and, as a result, a child could sus- ● It is the driver's responsibility to ensure tain serious or fatal injuries. that the key-operated switch is set to the correct position. – It is unpredictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy in the event of 71 Safety Transporting children safely Follow the manufacturer's instructions and bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 70. observe any statutory requirements when in- When transporting children, use a child seat stalling and using child seats. Always read appropriate to the age and size of each child. Safety for children and note ››› page 72. WARNING We recommend you always carry the manu- Introduction facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- gether with the on-board documentation. senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- For safety reasons, as we have learned from ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident statistics, we recommend that chil- accident increases. dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear ● An inflating front passenger airbag can seats. Depending on their age, height and Important information regarding the strike the rear-facing child seat and project it weight, children travelling in rear seats must front passenger's airbag with great force against the door, the roof or use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- the backrest. sons, the child seat should be installed in the Read the additional information carefully ● Never install a child seat facing backwards rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or ›››  page 16. on the front passenger seat unless the front in the centre back seat. Read and always observe the safety informa- passenger front airbag has been disabled. The physical laws involved and the forces tion included in the following chapters: Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! acting in a collision apply also to children However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca- ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- ››› page 63. But unlike adults, children do not ses, to transport a child in the front passenger airbag . have fully developed muscle and bone struc- ››› page 66 ger seat, the front passenger front airbag must always be disabled ››› page 70, Deacti- tures. This means that children are subject to ● Objects between the passenger and the vation of front passenger front airbag*. If the passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags a greater risk of injury. front passenger seat has a height adjustment on page 69. To reduce the risk of injuries, children must option, move it to the highest position. always use special child restraint systems The passenger side front airbag, when ena- ● For those vehicles that do not include a key when travelling in the vehicle. bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a technical service. We recommend the use of child safety prod- backward since the airbag can strike the seat ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- with such force that it can cause serious or ● All vehicle occupants, especially children, gramme, which includes systems for all ages fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling. made by “Peke” (not for all countries). should always travel on the rear seat. ● Never hold children or babies on your lap, These systems have been especially de- Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats. This is this can result in potentially fatal injuries to signed and approved, complying with the the child! ECE-R44. regulation. the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- 72 Transporting children safely

● Never allow a child to be transported in a ● When a child seat is mounted in the rear WARNING vehicle without being properly secured, or to seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac- An undue installation of the safety seat will stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. tivated ››› page 109. increase the risk of injury in the event of a In an accident, the child could be flung crash. through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in- ● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the juries to themselves and to the other vehicle data Technical occupants. Child seats luggage compartment. ● If children assume an improper sitting posi- ● Never secure or tie luggage or other items tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose Safety instructions to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper themselves to greater risk of injury in the ones (Top Tether).

event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an Read the additional information carefully Advice accident. This is particularly important if the ›››  page 16. child is travelling on the front passenger seat Categorisation of child seats into and the airbag system is triggered in an acci- WARNING dent; as this could cause serious injury or groups even death. When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable Only use child seats that are officially ap- ● A suitable child seat can protect your child! for age, weight and size. proved and suitable for the child. ●

Never leave a child alone in the child seat Operation ● Read and always observe information and or inside the vehicle because depending on Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- warnings concerning the use of child seats the season, very high temperatures may be R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis- ››› page 72. reached inside a parked vehicle, which could sion for Europe Regulation. be fatal. The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall WARNING ries: must not wear a normal seat belt without a The retaining rings are designed only for use child seat, as this could cause injuries to the Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9

with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system child Emergencies abdominal and neck areas during a sudden seats. months) braking manoeuvre or in an accident. ● Never secure other child seats that do not Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 ● Do not allow the seat belt to become twis- have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or months) ted and the seat belt should be properly in retaining belts or objects to the fastening place ››› page 61. rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 Safety ● Only one child may occupy a child seat ries to the child. years old) ››› page 73, Child seats. ● Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se- Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 curing rings. years old) »

73 Safety

Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7 years old)

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 standard bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it). Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats. We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation. SEAT recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at SEAT dealers.

WARNING Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats ››› page 72.

74 Self-help

Emergencies Note count attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury. ● The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's standard equip- ● Use the jack only on a firm, level ground. Self-help ment. ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is ● The first aid kit must comply with legal re- on the jack. Risk of accident. Technical data Technical Emergency equipment quirements. ● If work is to be carried out underneath the ● Observe the expiry date of the contents of vehicle, this must be secured by suitable Emergency warning triangle* the first aid kit. After it has expired you means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury. should purchase a new one. The use of reflective warning triangles is

● The fire extinguisher must comply with le- Note Advice obligatory in emergencies in some countries. gal requirements. As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light The jack does not generally require any main- ● Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully bulbs. tenance. If required, it should be greased us- functional. The fire extinguisher should, ing universal type grease. The warning triangle is under the storage therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker compartment which is located under the lug- on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the next date for checking. gage compartment floor. Spare wheel (temporary spare

● Before acquiring accessories and emergen- Operation Note cy equipment see the instructions in “Acces- wheel)* sories and spares” ››› page 187. ● The warning triangle is not part of the vehi- The temporary spare wheel is stored under cle's standard equipment. the floor panel in the luggage compartment ● The warning triangle should meet legal re- and is attached by a thumbnut. quirements. Vehicle tools How to use the temporary spare wheel Read the additional information carefully Emergencies ›››  page 47 If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of First-aid kit and fire extinguisher* pressure, the temporary spare wheel is only Some of the items listed are only provided in intended for temporary use until you reach a The first-aid kit can go in the storage com- certain model versions, or are optional ex- workshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soon partment which is located under the luggage tras. as possible. compartment floor. Safety WARNING Please note the following restrictions when The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug- using the temporary spare wheel. This tem- gage compartment carpet with Velcro. ● The factory-supplied jack is only designed porary spare wheel has been specially de- for changing wheels on this model. On no ac- signed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be » 75 Emergencies

changed with the temporary spare wheel ● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob- from another vehicle. tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in No other type of tyre (normal summer or win- After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, place. ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tempo- you must again check the tyre pressure about rary spare wheel rim. 10 minutes after starting the engine. WARNING You should only use the tyre mobility set if Snow chains ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are For technical reasons, snow chains must not Failure to do so may cause an accident. The familiar with the procedure and you have the be used on the temporary spare wheel. tyre pressures are listed on the inside of the necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance. If you have a puncture on one of the front fuel tank flap. wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- ● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on Do not use the tyre sealant in the following wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel the vehicle: risk of accident! cases: that you have removed and replace the punc- ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and ● If the wheel rim has been damaged. tured front wheel with this wheel. fast cornering: risk of accident! ● In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F). ● Never use more than one temporary spare ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the Extraction of the spare wheel in vehicles wheel at the same time, risk of accident. tyre greater than 4 mm. with SEAT SOUND 6 speakers (with subwoof- ● No other type of tyre (normal summer or ● er)* winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact If you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre. ● Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel temporary spare wheel rim. (carpet) as follows: ● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by date. ● Pull the carpet upwards to remove it. ● Disconnect the subwoofer's speaker cable. Tyre repair WARNING ● Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise. Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* ● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the spare wheel. roadside. Please observe the following rules Read the additional information carefully to minimise the risk of injury: ● When replacing the spare wheel, place the ›››  page 46 subwoofer speaker in the direction indicated ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. by the arrow and with the word “FRONT” fac- The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) Park it at a safe distance from surrounding traffic to fill the tyre. ing forward. will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a foreign body of up to about

76 Self-help

● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and Contents of the tyre mobility system* and solid. fast cornering. ● All passengers and particularly children ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum must keep a safe distance from the work area. speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn the tyre. Technical data Technical other road users. ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you are For the sake of the environment familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth- Dispose of used or expired sealant observing erwise, you should seek professional assis- any legal requirements. tance. Advice ● The tyre mobility set is intended for temporary emergency use only until you can reach Note the nearest specialised workshop. ● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo- SEAT dealerships. bility set as soon as possible. ● Take into account the separate instruction Fig. 86 Standard representation: contents of ● The sealant is a health hazard and must be manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur- the anti-puncture kit. cleaned immediately if it comes into contact er. Operation with the skin. The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compart- ● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the ment. It includes the following components reach of small children. ››› Fig. 86: ● Never use a jack, even if it has been approved for your vehicle. 1 Tyre valve remover ● Always stop the engine, apply the hand- 2 Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” Emergencies manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of vehicle involuntary movement. 3 Filler tube with cap 4 Air compressor WARNING 5 Tube for inflating tyres

A tyre filled with sealant does not have the 6 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- Safety same performance properties as a conven- toring system (it can also be integrated in tional tyre. the compressor). » ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

77 Emergencies

7 Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres- Check after 10 minutes of driving Changing the windscreen wiper sor may have a button). blades 8 ON/OFF switch Screw in the inflator tube ››› Fig. 86 5 again and check the pressure on the gauge 6 . 9 12 volt connector Changing the windscreen and rear 10 Bottle of sealant 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: window wiper blades 11 Spare tyre valve ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed Read the additional information carefully sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the ›››  page 54. lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert ● You should obtain professional assistance Perfect wiper blade condition is essential for can only be screwed or unscrewed in this ››› . clear vision. Damaged wiper blades should way. This also applies to its replacement part be replaced immediately. 11 . 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as WARNING again. standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- When inflating the wheel, the air compressor ● Carefully resume your journey, without ex- lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the and the inflator tube may become hot. ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reach noise of the water as it is wiped across the ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. the nearest specialised workshop and re- windscreen will be louder. ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or place the tyre. hot air compressor on flammable material. Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, ● Allow them to cool before storing the de- WARNING they should be changed if they are damaged, vice. Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at and can cause accidents and serious injury. least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure If this does not produce the desired results, too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. the setting angle of the windscreen wiper good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- ● Seek specialist assistance. arms might be incorrect. They should be tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance. checked by a specialised workshop and corrected if necessary. CAUTION WARNING Switch off the air compressor after a maximum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over- Do not drive unless you have good visibility heating! Before switching on the air compres- through all windows! sor again, let it cool for several minutes. 78 Self-help

● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all Towing or tow-starting WARNING windows regularly. If the vehicle has no electrical power, the ● The wiper blades should be changed once Notes brake lights, turn signals and all other lights or twice a year. will no longer function. Do not have the vehi- Read the additional information carefully cle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc- Technical data Technical CAUTION ›››  page 51 tion could result in an accident. ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could Please observe the following points if you scratch the glass. use a tow rope: WARNING ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint Vehicle handling and braking capacity thinner or similar products to clean the win- Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle change considerably during towing. Please Advice dows. This could damage the windscreen – Move the vehicle slowly until the cable is observe the following instructions to mini- wiper blades. taut. Then accelerate gradually. mise the risk of serious accidents and injury: ● Never move any windscreen wiper by hand. ● As the driver of the vehicle being towed: – Begin and change gears cautiously. If you This could cause damage. are driving an automatic vehicle, accelerate – You should depress the brake much harder as the brake servo does not operate. ● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the gently. windscreen wiper arms, the latter should only Pay the utmost attention to avoid crash- be lifted off the windscreen when in service – Remember that the brake servo and power ing into the towing vehicle. Operation position. steering are not working in the vehicle you – More strength is required at the steering are towing. Brake sooner than normal and wheel as the power steering does not op- Note pressing the pedal gently. erate when the engine is switched off. ● As the driver of the towing vehicle: ● The windscreen wiper arms can be moved Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle to the service position only when the bonnet – Accelerate with particular care and cau- is properly closed. – Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all tion. Emergencies ● You can also use the service position, for times when towing. – Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. example, if you want to fix a cover over the Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox – Brake earlier than usual and more windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of smoothly. ice. ● Put the selector lever into position “N”. ● Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph).

CAUTION Safety ● Do not tow further than 50 km. When tow-starting, fuel could enter the cata- ● If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle lytic converter and damage it. » must be towed with the front wheels raised.

79 Emergencies

Note Towline anchorages Fuses and bulbs ● Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting. Fuses ● Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe any regulations Introduction to the contrary. ● For technical reasons, vehicles with an au- Due to the constant updating of vehicles, tomatic gearbox must not be tow-started. fuse assignments based on equipment and ● If there is no lubricant in the gearbox as the the use of the same fuse for various electrical result of a fault, you must raise the driven components, it is not possible to provide an wheels while the vehicle is being towed. up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for ● the electrical components at the time this If the vehicle has to be towed more than Fig. 87 Towline anchorage at the front of the manual was printed. For detailed information 50 km (30 miles), the front wheels should be vehicle raised during towing, and towing should be about the fuse positions, please consult a carried out by a qualified person. Read the additional information carefully technical service. ● The steering wheel is locked when the vehi- ›››  page 51 In general, a fuse can be assigned to various cle has no electrical power. The vehicle must electrical components. Likewise, an electrical then be towed with the front wheels raised. Fitting the front towline anchorage component can be protected by several Towing should be carried out by a qualified fuses. person. – Take the towline anchorage from the on- ● The towline anchorage should always be board tool set. Only replace fuses when the cause of the kept in the vehicle. – Remove the front cover by pressing down problem has been solved. If a newly inserted on its left-hand side. For FR finishes, press fuse blows after a short time, you must have down and pull outwards. For the rest of the the electrical system checked by a special- Sport finishes, remove the cover by insert- ised workshop as soon as possible. ing a screwdriver into the lower slot and levering gently. WARNING The high voltages in the electrical system can – Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in give serious electrical shocks, causing burns the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 87. and even death! Rear towline anchorage ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. There is a towline anchorage at the rear on the right below the rear bumper. 80 Fuses and bulbs

● Take care not to cause short circuits in the Note No. Consumer/Amps electrical system. ● One component may have more than one 3 Power C63 (30 Power) 30 fuse. WARNING ● Several components may run on a single 4 PTC Relay (Engine glow) 50 fuse. Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or Left pillar connector A pin 22 (motor data Technical 5 30 bridging a current circuit without fuses can ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than for closing window on driver's side) cause a fire and serious injury. those indicated in this chapter. These should 6 For closing back left window (motor) 30 ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only only be changed by a specialised workshop. replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- 7 Horn 20

age (same colour and markings) and size. pear in the following tables. Advice 9 Panoramic roof 30 ● Never repair a fuse. ● Some of the equipment listed in the tables ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple below pertain only to certain versions of the 10 Active suspension 7.5 or similar. model or are optional extras. 11 Headlight washer system relay 30 ● Please note that the above lists, while correct at the time of printing, are subject to 12 MIB display 5 CAUTION change. ● (RL-15) SIDO Kl.15 supply (inputs 29 To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric 13 30 Operation system, before replacing a fuse always turn and 55) off the ignition, the lights and all electrical Fuses to the left of the instrument Removing ignition key, diagnostics, elements and remove the key from the igni- headlight lever (flashers), switching 14 7.5 tion. panel on dipped /side beams (rotating ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating lights) fuse, you could cause damage to another part Read the additional information carefully Air and heat control (supply) of the electrical system. ›››  page 44

15 7.5 Emergencies ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same Automatic gearbox lever vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can amperage (same colour and markings) and 16 Instrument panel 5 damage the electrical system. size. ● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov- 17 Dwa Sensor, Alarm horn 7.5 ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems Control box 1

23 Dual windscreen cleaner pump 7.5 Safety with your vehicle. No. Consumer/Amps Engine heater, heating control box 24 30 1 Left lights 40 (supply)

2 Central locking 40 26 12V Relay socket 20 » 81 Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps

27 Rear window wiper motor 15 43 Rear right window control 30 Fan, condenser 40 1 28 Lighter 20 44 Reversing camera 10 TK8 fan, condenser 50

Airbag control unit, airbag deactiva- Windscreen wiper feed lever, diagnos- 2 Glow plugs 50 29 10 45 10 tion warning lamp tics ABS Pump 40 Reverse, Mirror joysticks, RKA, switch- 47 ABS Ventil (rear battery) 25 3 ing on heated seats, int. pressure A.C, EMBOX2-13 (TA8) 20 heating A.C. controls (supply), electro- EKP TDI relay (fuel pump feed) 30 30 7.5 chromic mirror, PDC control, switching 4 PTC glow phase 2 40 on front and rear fog lights (rotating 49 EKP MPI relay (fuel pump feed) 20 5 PTC glow phase 3 40 lights). TFSI pump gauge control 15 6 BDM, 30 ReF 5 31 Petrol gauge 5 50 Multimedia Radio (power supply) 20 7 MSG (KL30) 7.5 AFS headlights, headlight regulator 51 Heated mirrors 10 (signal and adjustment), LWR Cent, di- 8 Windscreen wipers 30 32 agnostics, front headlight lever 7.5 53 Rain sensor 5 (switch on), Dimmer (headlight adjust- Automatic gear box control, AQ 160 9 30 ment) 54 30 ZAS (ignition switch) 5 Control box

33 Start-Stop relay, clutch sensor 5 55 Heated seats 10 ABS Ventil 25 10 34 Heated jets 5 EMBOX2-11 (TA8) 5

Soundaktor control feed, GRA feed, 11 Vacuum pump motor 20 35 5 Fuse arrangement in engine compart- Kühlerlüfter central feed ment Injectors 36 Heated seats 10 12 10 Read the additional information carefully TDI fuel metering adjuster, TA8 ex- 37 Additional diagnostics 10 ›››  page 44 haust temperature sensor 38 Right hand lights A/66 feed 40 Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same 13 Servo sensor 5 39 ABS Pump (rear battery) 40 amperage (same colour and markings) and Coolant pump high/low temperature, 14 10 size. gauge (relay EKP) 41 Heated rear window 30 15 50 controls motor diag 5 42 Passenger side window controls 30 82 Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps A bulb must only be replaced by one of the CAUTION same type. The type is indicated on the bulb, 16 Starter motor 30 either on the glass part or on the base. ● Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit 17 Controls motor (MSG KL87) 20 could occur. Xenon headlights ● Switch off the lights or parking lights be- PTC Relays, TOG sensor, engine data Technical 18 10 With this type of headlight, the user can re- valves, PWM fan fore you change a bulb. place the turn signal bulb. Replacement of 19 Lambda sensors 15 the dipped/main beam bulb must be done by Technical Services, given that complex ele- For the sake of the environment Glow plug relay, Heizrohr 5 ments must be removed from the vehicle and Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis- Ignition coil 20 the automatic control system that incorpo- pose of used bulbs in the proper manner. Advice rates it must be reset. 20 Pre-wired motor (coolant pump, varia- ble valve distributor, active carbon The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the Note 10 solenoid valve filter, pressure valve, light flux and have an average lifespan of 5 ● Depending on weather conditions (cold or secondary air inlet valve) times more than that of halogen bulbs, this wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail means that, except due to unusual circum- lights and the turn signals may be temporari- stances, there is no need to change the bulbs ly misted. This has no influence on the useful Operation for the whole life of the vehicle. life of the lighting system. By switching on Changing bulbs the lights, the area through which the beam WARNING of light is projected will quickly be demisted. General notes However, the edges may continue to be mis- ● Take particular care when working on com- ted. ponents in the engine compartment if the en- Read the additional information carefully ● Please check at regular intervals that all gine is warm, there is a risk of burns. ›››  page 45 lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on ● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The your vehicle is functioning properly. This is Emergencies Before changing any bulb, first turn off the glass can break when you touch the bulb, not only in the interest of your own safety, failed device. causing injury. but also that of all other road users. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with ● The high voltage element of gas discharge ● Before changing a bulb, make sure you your bare hands. The fingerprints left on the bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correct- have the correct new bulb.

ly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death. Safety glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen- ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life and ● When changing bulbs, please take care not your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel causing condensation on the reflector sur- to injure yourself on sharp parts in the head- instead. The residue left by the fingerprints » face, thus reducing effectiveness. light housing.

83 Emergencies

would vaporise as a result of the heat gener- Turn signal and DRL (day light) light – Installation involves all of the above steps ated by the bulb, they will be deposited on in reverse sequence. the reflector and will impair its surface.

Dipped/main beam headlights and Single headlight bulb change side light

Position of the bulbs

Fig. 89 Single headlight DRL light (day light).

Fig. 91 Single headlight.

Fig. 88 Single headlight.

A Side lights - Dipped beam/main beam. B Turn signal light. C DRL (day light) Fig. 90 Single turn signal lamp.

– Raise the bonnet. – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 89 1 or ››› Fig. 90 2 to the left and pull. Fig. 92 Dipped beam/main beam and side – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb light of the single headlight. holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the same time.

84 Fuses and bulbs

Remove the cover – Check whether the new bulb is working. Side light and main beam – Raise the bonnet. – Move the loop ››› Fig. 91 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover. Double headlight bulb change Technical data Technical Changing the dipped/main beam headlight Position of the bulbs – Remove connector ››› Fig. 92 3 from the bulb. – Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 92 2 Advice pressing inwards to the right.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so Fig. 94 Double headlight. that the lug on the base fits into the recess on the reflector. – Fit the connector.

– Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure Operation that the gasket sits well on the casing cover Fig. 93 Double headlight. during the operation. A Side lights – Check whether the new bulb is working. B Main beam headlights Changing the side light C Dipped beam headlights

– Extract the bulb holder ››› Fig. 92 4 out- D Turn signal Emergencies Fig. 95 Side light and main beam headlights. wards. E DRL (LED day light) – Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit- Remove the cover ting the new one. – Raise the bonnet. – Installation involves all of the above steps – Move the loop 1 in the direction of the ar- Safety in reverse sequence. row and remove the cover ››› Fig. 94. » – Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the casing cover during the operation. 85 Emergencies

Changing the side light Dipped beam headlight – Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 97 3 pressing inwards to the right. – Remove connector ››› Fig. 95 2 by pulling outward. – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so – Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit- that the lug on the base fits into the recess ting the new one. on the reflector. – Installation involves all of the above steps – Fit the connector. in reverse sequence. – Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure – Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the casing cover that the gasket sits well on the casing cover during the operation. during the operation. – Check whether the new bulb is working.

– Check whether the new bulb is working. Fig. 96 Double headlight.

Changing the main beam bulb Turn signal light – Remove connector ››› Fig. 95 3 by pulling outward. – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly into the cut-out on the reflector. – Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence. – Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the casing cover Fig. 97 Dipped beam headlights. during the operation. – Raise the bonnet. Fig. 98 Turn signal light. – Check whether the new bulb is working. – Move the loop ››› Fig. 96 1 in the direction – Raise the bonnet. of the arrow and remove the cover. – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 98 1 to the left – Remove connector ››› Fig. 97 2 from the and pull. bulb.

86 Fuses and bulbs

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb Changing the xenon bulb Changing the fog light bulbs holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the same time. The procedure for changing the bulb is the Front fog light bulb same on both sides of the vehicle. – Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

WARNING data Technical This type of bulb should be changed at a specialised workshop. Changing the AFS headlight bulbs Turn signal bulb Advice Position of the bulbs

Fig. 101 Front fog light. Operation

Fig. 100 Turn signal light.

Fig. 99 AFS headlight bulbs. Emergencies – Raise the bonnet. A Turn signal – Turn bulb holder ››› Fig. 100 A to the left B Xenon headlight (dipped beam/main and pull. Fig. 102 Front fog light. beam) – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb – Remove the bolt ››› Fig. 101 1 from the fog holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the light grille with a screwdriver. Safety same time. – Subsequently, remove the clips located on – Installation involves all of the above steps the edge of the grill with gentle leverage. » in reverse sequence. 87 Emergencies

– Remove the 3 bolts ››› Fig. 102 2 to re- Note Changing the tail light bulbs move the fog light. Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light – Remove the metal clip situated on the up- bulbs, have them replaced at a Technical Summary of LED tail lights per part of the fog light by pulling towards Service or specialised workshop. the exterior of the vehicle ››› Fig. 102 3 . LED ● Brake lights Remove the bulb holder ● Side lights FR version fog-light bulb Bulbs ● Retro fog light ● Reverse lights ● Turn signal

Access to tail lights

Fig. 104 Front fog light. Fig. 103 Fog light: access to the connector and to the light bulb holder. – Remove connector ››› Fig. 104 1 from the bulb. – Remove the 4 bolts A ››› Fig. 103 from the inside of the wheel housing and the 2 bot- – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 104 2 to the tom bolts B ››› Fig. 103 from the bumper left and pull. with a screwdriver. – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb – Pull the bumper to release it from its an- holder and turning it counter-clockwise at the same time. chorages to access the connector and the Fig. 105 Access to tail lights. light bulb holder. – Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence. ● Open the rear lid. – Check that the bulb works properly. ● Turn the bolt in the direction of the arrow, by hand or with a screwdriver ››› Fig. 105.

88 Fuses and bulbs

● Remove the tail light, by pulling it out- ● Remove the connector from housing A Changing the side and interior wards. ››› Fig. 105. bulbs ● Remove the bulb holder, separating it from the casing. To do this, press tabs B in the Changing the tail light bulbs direction of the arrows ››› Fig. 106. Turn signals Technical data Technical ● When the bulb holder has been removed, press in the direction of the arrow 1 and at the same time, turn in the direction of the arrow 2 ››› Fig. 107

Changing bulbs. LED lamps Advice Carry out the same operations as in lights fitted with bulbs. If necessary, remove the socket, as if it were a bulb. Fig. 108 Turn signals.

If the brake light and/or side light with LEDs Operation have to be replaced, the tail light must be re- – Press the turn signal to the left or to the Fig. 106 Changing the tail light bulbs placed. right to remove the bulb. – Remove the bulb holder from the turn signal. – Remove the failed bulb and replace with a

new bulb. Emergencies – Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into place. – First fit the turn signal in the opening in the chassis, fastening the tabs 1 ››› Fig. 108, and then fit in the bulb as shown by the ar- Safety Fig. 107 Changing the tail light bulbs row 2 ››› Fig. 108.

89 Emergencies

Number plate light Interior light and front reading lights front part until the two long tabs click on the support. – Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the special slot and remove the bulb. – Remove the bulb holder, by turning it until Luggage compartment light* it is free. – Change the bulb. – Replace the bulb holder, by turning it until it fits fully. – Fit the light into the space and press until you hear a “click”. Fig. 109 Front reading light.

To remove the glass Additional brake light* – Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas- Fig. 110 Boot light. Given the difficulty involved in the replace- ing and the glass ››› Fig. 109. ment of this light it should be done by Tech- – Carefully remove the glass, levering it to nical Services. avoid possible damage.

To replace the bulbs – Pull the bulbs outwards. – To remove the central bulb, hold and press to one side.

Assembly – Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen- Fig. 111 Boot light. tly on the outer edge of the side light. – First fit the glass with the fastening tabs – Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside over the frame of the switch. Next press the edge -arrow- using the flat side of a screwdriver ››› Fig. 110.

90 Fuses and bulbs

– Press the bulb sideways and remove it from its housing ››› Fig. 111. Technical data Technical Advice Operation Emergencies Safety

91 Operation

Fig. 112 Dash panel.

92 Controls and displays Operation 8 Steering and starter lock ...... 147 17 Controls in the centre console: 9 Lever for: – Start-Stop operation button . . . . . 170 Controls and displays – Windscreen wipers and washer . . 123 – Tyre pressure monitoring* ...... 213 – Window washer-wiper system* . . 123 – Heated rear window ...... 123

General instrument panel – Multi-function display control* . . 25 – Heated seats* ...... 128 data Technical 10 Infotainment system: – Central locking* ...... 108 1 Door release lever 11 Depending on the equipment, 18 Handbrake lever ...... 149 2 Light switch ...... 117 glove compartment with: ...... 130 19 Gear lever 3 Headlight range control* ...... 121 Advice – CD player* and/or SD card* – Automatic* ...... 158 4 Air vents ››› Booklet Radio – Manual ...... 158 5 Lever for: 12 Passenger airbag* ...... 14 20 Storage space – Turn signals/main beam head- 13 Switches for: 21 Pedals ...... 61 lights ...... 119 – Heating and ventilation ...... 139 22 Steering column control lever* . . . . 13 – Cruise control* ...... 180 – Air conditioning* ...... 141 23 Bonnet release lever ...... 199 6 Instrument panel and warning – Climatronic* ...... 143 Operation lamps: 24 Fuse housing ...... 80 14 Depending on the equipment, but- – Instruments ...... 94 tons for: 25 Control for adjusting electric exteri- or mirrors* ...... 126 – Warning and indication lamps . . . 35 – SEAT Drive Profile ...... 182 26 Electric window controls* ...... 114 7 Steering wheel with horn and – Park assist system ...... 173 – Driver airbag ...... 66 – Hazard warning lights ...... 121 Note Emergencies – On-board computer controls . . . . 25 – Airbag off warning lamp* ...... 68, 70 Some of the items of equipment listed here – Controls for radio, telephone, 15 Depending on the equipment: are fitted only on certain model versions or navigation and speech dialogue are optional extras. – USB/AUX-IN input ...... 105 system ››› Booklet Radio – Cigarette lighter/Power socket . . 132

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- Safety shift (automatic gearbox) ...... 161 16 Drink holder/Ashtray ...... 131

93 Operation Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instruments

General instrument panel

Fig. 113 Instrument panel, on dash panel

The layout of the instruments depends upon change up a gear or move the selector 5 Speedometer. the model and the engine. lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- 6 Fuel gauge ››› page 98. ator) before the needle reaches the red 1 Rev counter (with the engine running, in zone ››› . hundreds of revolutions per minute) WARNING 2 gine c ››› page 95. En oolant temperature display Any distraction may lead to an accident, with ››› page 97. The beginning of the red zone of the rev the risk of injury. counter indicates the maximum speed in 3 Displays on the screen ››› page 95. ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- any gear after running-in and with the en- 4 Adjuster button and display trols when driving. gine hot. However, it is advisable to ››› page 97. 94 Instruments and warning/control lamps

CAUTION We recommend that you avoid high revs and ● Shift lever position ››› page 158. that you follow the recommendations on the ● ● Recommended gear (manual gearbox) To prevent damage to the engine, the rev gear-change indicator. Consult the additional counter needle should only remain in the red ›››  page 28. information in ›››  page 28, Gear-change zone for a short period of time. ● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus indicator. ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs with different setting options ›››  page 25. Technical data Technical and heavy acceleration and do not make the CAUTION ● Service interval display ›››  page 33. engine work hard. Never allow the rev counter needle 1 ● Second speed display ›››  page 25. ››› Fig. 113 to go into the red zone on the ● Speed warning function ›››  page 32. For the sake of the environment scale for more than a very brief period, other- ● Start-Stop system status display Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con- wise there is a risk of engine damage. Advice page 170. sumption and noise. ››› ● Low consumption driving status (ECO) For the sake of the environment ››› page 96 Changing up a gear early will help you to save ● Identifying letters on engine (MKB). Rev counter fuel and minimise emissions and engine noise. ● Active cylinder management display The rev counter indicates the number of en- (ACT®)* ››› page 165 gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 113 1 . Operation Together with the gear-change indicator, the Indications on the display Distance travelled rev counter offers you the possibility of using The odometer registers the total distance the engine of your vehicle at a suitable A variety of information can be viewed on the travelled by the car. speed. instrument panel display ››› Fig. 113 3 depending on the vehicle equipment: The odometer (trip) shows the distance The start of the red zone on the dial indicates travelled since the last odometer reset. The the maximum engine speed which may be ● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan- Emergencies used briefly when the engine is warm and af- ›››  page 28. ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile. ter it has been run in properly. Before reach- ● Information and warning texts. ing this range, you should change to a higher ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 113 4 to re- gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for ● Mileage. set the trip recorder to 0. automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in ● Time. ● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 Safety “D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped- ● Navigation instructions. seconds and the previous value will be dis- al. played. » ● Outside temperature. ● Compass. 95 Operation

Time Second speed display (mph or km/h) tion status due to active cylinder manage- ® ● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 113 In addition to the speedometer, the speed ment (ACT )* ›››  page 30. 4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select can also be displayed in a different unit of the hour or minute display. measurement (in miles or in km per hour). Identifying letters on engine (MKB) ● To continue setting the time, press the up- This option cannot be deactivated in models Hold the button ››› Fig. 113 4 down for more per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but- destined for countries in which the second than 15 seconds to display the identifying ton down to scroll through the numbers speed must always be visible. letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do quickly. this, the ignition must be switched on and The second speed display can be adjusted in the engine switched off. ● Press the button 4 again in order to finish the Easy Connect system via the  key and setting the time. the Setup function button ››› page 99. WARNING The time can also be set via the  key and Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning Setup function button in the Easy Connect Speed warning symbols on page 99. system ››› page 99. When the speed setting is exceeded, this will be indicated on the instrument panel display. WARNING Compass This is very useful, for example when using winter tyres that are not designed for driving Even though outside temperatures are above With the ignition on and the navigation sys- freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy. tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to at the maximum speed of the vehicle ● At outside temperatures above +4°C the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis- ›››  page 32. (+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol” played on the instrument panel. The speed warning settings can be adjusted is not visible, there may still be patches of ice in the Easy Connect system via the  key on the road. Selector lever position and the Setup function button . ››› page 99 ● Do not rely on the outside temperature in- The selected gear is displayed on the side of dicator! the selector lever and on the instrument pan- Start-Stop operating display el display. In positions D and S, and with the Updated information relating to the status is Note Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis- displayed on the instrument panel ● played. ››› page 170. Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the Recommended gear (manual gearbox) Low consumption driving status (ECO)* case of displays without warning or informa- The recommended gear in order to save fuel Depending on the equipment, when driving, tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by is displayed on the instrument panel while the “ECO” display appears on the instrument the warning lamps. you are driving ›››  page 28. panel when the vehicle is in low consump- 96 Instruments and warning/control lamps

● Depending on the equipment, some set- Odometer/trip recorder Engine cold tings and instructions can also be carried out The odometer shows the total distance cov- If only the diodes in the lower part of the in the Easy Connect system. ered by the vehicle. scale light up, this indicates that the engine ● When several warnings are active at the has not yet reached operating temperature. The trip recorder shows the distance that has same time, the symbols are shown succes- Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and

been travelled since it was last reset. It is data Technical sively for a few seconds and will stay on until do not make the engine work hard. the fault is rectified. used to measure short trips. The last digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or tenths of a mile. Normal temperature If in normal operations, the diodes light up The trip recorder can be set to zero by press- Odometer until the central zone, it means that the ening 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 114. Advice gine has reached operating temperature. At high outside temperatures and when making Fault display the engine work hard, the diodes may contin- If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder is no cause for concern, provided the control display. Have the fault repaired immediately, lamp  does not light up on the instrument as far as is possible. panel digital display. Operation

Heat range Coolant temperature gauge When the diodes light up in the upper area of the display and the control lamp appears  Fig. 114 Instrument panel: odometer and re- For vehicles with no coolant temperature on the instrument panel display, the coolant set button.  gauge, a control lamp appears for high temperature is excessive ››› page 204. coolant temperatures page 204. Please ››› Emergencies The distance covered is displayed in “kilome- note ››› . CAUTION tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to change the measurement units (kilometres The coolant temperature gauge 2 ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine, “km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*. ››› Fig. 113 only works when the ignition is avoid high revs, driving at high speed and Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions switched on. In order to avoid engine dam- making the engine work hard for approxi-

Manual for more details. age, please read the following notes for the mately the first 15 minutes when the engine Safety different temperature ranges. is cold. The phase until the engine is warm also depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature* ›››  page 31 as a guide. » 97 Operation

● Additional lights and other accessories in The distance to empty fuel level is displayed after the other for about 2 seconds at a time front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect on the instrument panel 3 ››› Fig. 113. and will continue until the fault is corrected. of the coolant. At high outside temperatures You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- No menus will be shown in the display for the and high engine loads, there is a risk of the hicle in the ›››  page 40 section. duration of a priority 1 warning message. engine overheating. ● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri- CAUTION Examples of priority 1 warning messages bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is (red) moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re- Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir- duce the cooling effect, which could cause regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. In ● Brake system symbol  with the warning the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis- this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex- message STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUC- tance. haust system, which could cause the catalytic TION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT IN- converter to overheat resulting in damage. STRUCTION MANUAL. ● Coolant symbol  with the warning mes- Fuel level sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION Warning and control lamps MANUAL. ● Engine oil pressure symbol  with the Warning symbols warning message STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 35 Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow) There are red warning symbols (priority 1) If one of these faults occurs, the correspond- and yellow warning symbols (priority 2). ing warning lamp lights up and is accompanied by an audible warning. Check the corre- Warning messages, Priority 1 (red) sponding function as soon as possible al- If one of these faults occurs, the warning though the vehicle may be used without risk. Fig. 115 Fuel gauge. lamp will light up or flash and will be accom- If several priority 2 warning messages are de- panied by three audible warnings. This is a The display 6 ››› Fig. 113 only works when tected at the same time, the symbols are dis- danger warning. Stop the vehicle and switch the ignition is switched on. When the display played one after the other for about 2 sec- off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. reaches the reserve mark, the lower diode onds at a time. After a set time, the informa- Obtain professional assistance if necessary. lights up in red and the control lamp  ap- tion text will disappear and the symbol will pears ››› page 94. When the fuel level is very If several priority 1 faults are detected at the be shown as a reminder at the side of the low, the lower diode flashes in red. same time, the symbols will be displayed one display.

98 Introduction to the Easy Connect system*

Priority 2 warning messages will not be CAUTION Introduction to the Easy shown until all Priority 1 warning messages have been dealt with! Failure to heed the control lamps and text Connect system* messages when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle. Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yel- System settings (CAR)* low):* data Technical ● Fuel warning light with the information text CAR menu (Setup) PLEASE REFUEL. Read the additional information carefully WARNING ›››  page 24 Advice If the warning lamps and messages are ignor- To select the settings menus, press the Easy ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may Connect  button and the Setup function cause accidents and severe injuries. button. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options in these me- ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics

● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en- and equipment. Operation sure that there are no highly flammable materials under the vehicle that could come into Pressing the menu button will always take contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry you to the last menu used. grass, fuel). When the function button check box is activa- ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- ted , the function is active. dent for the driver and for other road users. If Pressing the menu button  will always take necessary, switch on the hazard warning Emergencies lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad- you to the last menu used. vise other drivers. Any changes made using the settings menus ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the are automatically saved on closing those me- engine and allow it to cool. nus. » ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a Safety hazardous area and could cause severe injuries ››› page 198.

99 Operation

Function buttons in the Page vehicle settings menu

ESC system ››› page 152

Tyres ››› page 213

Driver assistance ››› table on page 24

Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 173

Vehicle lights ››› table on page 24

Mirrors and windscreen wipers ››› table on page 24

Opening and closing ››› table on page 24

Multifunction display ››› table on page 24

Date and time ››› table on page 24

Units ››› table on page 24

Service ››› page 95

Factory settings ››› table on page 24

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect system while driving could distract you from traffic.

100 Communications and multimedia Communications and multimedia

Steering wheel controls* Technical data Technical General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone and radio/navigation Advice functions without needing to distract the driver. There are two versions of the multifunction module:

● Audio system + telephone without voice control version (MID): for controlling the au- Operation dio functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel. ● Audio system + telephone with voice control version (HIGH): for controlling the audio

functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, Emergencies iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel. Safety

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment. 101 Operation

Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID)

Fig. 116 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down A Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

Short press: answer/hang up calls, enable/open the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the telephone menu. B phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument Hold down: reject an incoming panela). panela). panela). panela). call/switch to private mode/rediala).

Short press: switch to the previ- C Search for last station ous song No function No function No function Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next D Search for the next station song No function No function No function Hold down: fast forward

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument E , F panela) panela) panela) panela) panela)

G MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source

102 Communications and multimedia

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

Turn: Changes menu or memory Turn: Next/previous presetb) Turn: Next/previous songb) Turn: No function Turn: Acts on the MFD on instrument panel H Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Confirm Press: Operates on instrument panel Technical data Technical a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH) Advice Operation

Fig. 117 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa) Emergencies Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down A Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

Short press: answer/hang up Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- calls, enable/open the tele- Short press: access to the telephone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu. phone menu on the dash pan- B Safety ela). ela). ela). Hold down: reject an incoming ela). Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) call/switch to private/redial Hold down: rediala) » mode

103 Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Short press: switch to the previ- Radio/media functionality (ex- C Search for last station ous song No function No functionb) cept AUX ) Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next Radio/media functionality (ex- D Search for the next station song No function No functionb) cept AUX ) Hold down: fast forward

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument E , F panel panel panel panel panel

G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control

Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Next/previous presetc) Turn: Next/previous songc) menu depending on where it is menu depending on where it is menu depending on where it is Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- located located located H firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the menu option menu option dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the menu option menu option menu option

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX). c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

104 Communications and multimedia

Multimedia

USB/AUX-IN input Technical data Technical Advice

Fig. 118 USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the features and the country, the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN connec- Operation tion. The USB/AUX-IN input is located above the storage compartment in the front centre console ››› Fig. 118. The operating description is located in the respective Instruction Manuals of the audio Emergencies system or the navigation system. Safety

105 Operation Opening and closing – Automatic speed dependent locking and “Safe” security system** unlocking system* – Emergency unlocking system This is an anti-theft device which consists of Central locking system a double lock for the door locks and a deacti- Unlocking the vehicle* vation function for the boot in order to pre- Description vent forced entry. – Press button  ››› Fig. 122 on remote Read the additional information carefully control to unlock all the doors and rear Activation ›››  page 9. lid. The “safe” system is activated when the vehi- The central locking system enables you to Locking the vehicle* cle is locked using the key or the remote con- lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by trol. just pushing the button. – Press button  ››› Fig. 122 on the remote control to lock all doors and the To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in- Central locking can be activated by using any rear lid or turn the key in the door to lock serted in the door lock cylinder in the locking of the following options: all doors and the rear lid. direction. ● the key, by inserting it into the driver door To activate the system using the remote con- cylinder and rotating it in the opening direc- WARNING trol, press the lock button once  on the re- tion. Depending on the vehicle version, ei- ● Locking from the outside carelessly or with- mote. ther all doors will be unlocked or only the out good visibility may lead to bruising, par- Once this system is activated, opening doors ticularly in the case of children. driver door will be unlocked. All doors will be from the outside and the inside is not possi- locked on locking the vehicle using the key. ● When locking a vehicle, never leave chil- ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen- ● the interior central lock button dren unaccompanied inside, as from the out- tral lock button does not work. ››› page 108. side it will be difficult to provide assistance if required. When the ignition is switched off, the instru- ● the radio frequency remote control, using ● Having the doors locked prevents intruders ment panel display indicates that the “Safe” the buttons on the key ››› page 110. from getting in, for example when stopped at system is on. Various functions are available to improve a traffic light. Deactivation the vehicle safety: Note Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder – Locking system “Safe*” twice towards the locking direction. For anti-theft security, only the driver door is – Selective* unlocking system fitted with a lock cylinder. To activate the system using the remote con- – Self-locking system to prevent involunta- trol, press the lock button on the remote ry unlocking twice  in less than five seconds. 106 Opening and closing

On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarm difficult. Danger of death. Passengers could doors and to use the luggage compartment. volumetric sensor is also deactivated. become trapped inside in case of emergency. The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehicles fitted with one) are turned off. With the “Safe” switched off, doors can be opened from the interior but not from the ex- Unlocking the luggage compartment terior. Selective unlocking system* See ›››  page 9. data Technical See “Selective unlocking system*” This system allows to unlock either just the driver door or all the vehicle. Activating the selective unlocking system* “Safe” status With the door open, insert a key into the start On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi- Driver door unlock button

cylinder and start the ignition. Insert the oth- Advice ble from outside the vehicle through the win- Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote er key into the driver door lock and turn in the dow which shows the “Safe” system status. control. opening direction for at least 3 seconds. The We will know that “Safe” system is activated turn signals will flash twice. Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder, by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator rotate once in the unlock direction. The driver will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted Deactivating the selective unlocking system* door will remain without “Safe” and un- with an alarm, until they unlock. locked. In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see With the door open, insert a key into the start

Remember: the Anti-theft Alarm section ››› page 111. cylinder and start the ignition. Insert the oth- Operation er key into the driver door lock and turn in the Safe activated with or without an alarm: Using the remote control, press the unlock locking direction for at least 3 seconds. The warning lamp flashes continuously. button on the remote  once. The “Safe” turn signals will flash once. system for all the vehicle is deactivated, only Safe deactivated without an alarm: the warn- the driver door is unlocked and both the ing lamp stays off. alarm and the warning lamp are also turned Safe deactivated with an alarm: the warning off. Self-locking system to prevent invol- Emergencies lamp stays off. untary unlocking Unlocking all doors and the luggage com- WARNING partment It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- intentional unlocking of the vehicle. No one should remain inside the vehicle if the The unlock button on the remote control “Safe” system is activated because opening  If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the

must be pressed twice so that all doors Safety the doors will not be possible in the event of and the luggage compartment can be doors (including the boot) are opened within an emergency neither from the inside nor the opened. 30 seconds, it re-locks automatically. outside and help from the outside is made Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate the “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock all 107 Operation

Automatic speed-dependent locking Deactivating the system* Central lock button* and unlocking system* With the ignition on, press the unlocking key on the central locking system within 3 to 10 This is a safety system which prevents access seconds. to the vehicle from the outside when it is running (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light). In both cases, if the operation has been carried out correctly, the locking lamp will flash  Locking ››› Fig. 119.

The doors will lock automatically if the speed WARNING of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h The door handles must not be operated when (4 mph) is exceeded. the vehicle is running: the door would open. Fig. 119 Central lock button. If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors Note open, when starting again and exceeding the Read the additional information carefully If the airbags are triggered during an acci- mentioned speed, all doors will lock again. ›››  page 9 dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for the Unlocking luggage compartment. It is possible to lock The central lock button allows you to lock and the vehicle from inside with the central lock- unlock the vehicle from the inside. On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle ing, after turning the ignition off and back on will returns to its status prior to self-locking. again. The central lock button also works with the ignition switched off, except when the “safe” Each door can be unlocked and opened inde- system is activated. pendently from the inside (for example, when a passenger gets out). To do it, simply oper- Please note the following if you lock your ve- ate the lever inside the door. hicle with the central lock button: ● Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac- Activating the system* cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. With the ignition on, press the locking key on when stopped at a traffic light). the central locking system within 3 to 10 sec- ● The driver door cannot be locked while it is onds. open. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.

108 Opening and closing

● All doors can be unlocked separately from Childproof lock and clockwise for the right-hand side inside the vehicle. Do this by pulling the door doors. 3 Valid for vehicles: 5-door versions release lever once. Deactivating the childproof lock WARNING – Unlock the vehicle and open the door ● If the vehicle is locked, children and disa- whose childproof lock you want to deacti- data Technical bled people may be trapped inside it. vate. ● Repeated operation of central locking will – With the door open, rotate the groove in prevent the central lock button from working the door using the ignition key, anti-clock- for a few seconds. Then, it can only be un-

locked in case it has been previously locked. wise for the right-hand side doors, and Advice After few seconds, the central locking be- clockwise for the left-hand side doors comes operative again. ››› Fig. 120. ● The central lock button is not operative Fig. 120 Childproof lock on the left hand side Once the childproof lock is activated, the when the vehicle is locked from the outside door. door can only be opened from the outside. (with the remote control or the key). The childproof lock can be activated or deac- The childproof lock prevents the rear doors tivated by inserting the key in the groove Note from being opened from the inside. This sys- when the door is open, as described above. Operation tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- ● Vehicle locked,  button. cidentally while the vehicle is running. ● Vehicle unlocked,  button. This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated and deactivated manually, as described Emergencies below:

Activating the childproof lock – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to activate the childproof Safety lock. – With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 120 109 Operation

Keys WARNING Radio frequency remote con- ● An incorrect use of the keys can cause seri- trol* Set of keys ous injuries. ● Never leave children or disabled persons in Unlocking and locking the vehicle the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their own. ● An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation. Fig. 121 Set of keys. ● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result Fig. 122 Assignment of buttons on the re- The set of keys may consists of the following, in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always mote control key. depending on the version of your vehicle: take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. ● a remote control key ››› Fig. 121 A ● Never remove the key from the ignition if ● a key without remote control B , the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be im- ● a plastic key tab* C . possible to steer the vehicle. or CAUTION ● two keys without remote control B There are electronic components in the re- ● a plastic key tab* C . mote control key. Avoid wetting and hitting the keys. Duplicate keys Fig. 123 Range of the radio frequency remote If you need a replacement key, go to a Techni- control. cal Service with your vehicle identification number.

110 Opening and closing

The radio frequency remote control key is ● If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked While the vehicle is open: used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a by using the radio frequency remote control, – Press the  button 2 ››› Fig. 122 on the distance. the remote control key will have to be re- remote control. synchronised. For this, go to your technical By using button 4 ››› Fig. 122 on the control, services. – Then close the vehicle using the key shaft the key shaft is released.

within one minute. data Technical Unlocking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 122 1 . While the vehicle is closed: Locking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 122 2 . Replacing the battery – Press the  button 1 ››› Fig. 122 on the  Unlocking the rear lid. Press button If the battery indicator does not flash when remote control. 3 ››› Fig. 122 until all the turn signals on the the buttons are pushed, the battery must be Advice – Then close the vehicle using the key shaft vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but- replaced. ton  3 is pressed, you have 2 minutes to within one minute. open the door. Once this time has passed, it CAUTION It is possible that the vehicle could no longer will lock again. The use of inappropriate batteries may dam- be opened and closed with the remote con- Moreover, the battery indicator on the key age the radio frequency remote control. For trol if the button  is repeatedly pressed ››› Fig. 122 (arrow), will flash. this reason, always replace the dead battery outside of the effective range of the radio fre- with another of the same size and power. Operation The remote control transmitter and the bat- quency remote control. The remote control teries are integrated in the key. The receiver key will have to be resynchronised. is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de- For the sake of the environment Spare remote control keys are available at pends on different factors. The range is re- Used batteries must be disposed of at an ap- your Technical Service, where they must be duced as the batteries start to lose power. propriate waste facility or through an author- matched to the locking system. ised service, given that their components can Up to five remote control keys can be used. WARNING

affect the environment. Emergencies Read and observe the relevant warnings ››› in Set of keys on page 110. Synchronising the remote control key Anti-theft alarm* Note If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door Description of anti-theft alarm sys- Safety ● The radio frequency remote control key with the remote control, it should be re- tem* functions only when you are within range synchronised. ››› Fig. 123. The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it. The system » 111 Operation

will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- such as the Netherlands, the alarm is activa- and switch the ignition on, or press the un- nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced. ted immediately). lock button  on the remote control. The anti-theft alarm system is automatically ● A door is opened. In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm switched on when locking the vehicle. The ● Opening the bonnet. system, you have 15 seconds to insert the system is immediately activated and the turn key in the ignition lock and activate the igni- ● The rear lid is opened. signal light located on the driver door will tion if the vehicle is opened using the driver flash along with the turn signals, indicating ● Ignition switched on with a non-validated door key. that the alarm and the locking security sys- key. Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. tem (double lock) have been turned on. ● Movements in the driving compartment and the ignition will be blocked. (vehicles with a volume sensor). If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, they will not be included in the protection ● Towing of the vehicle1). Note 1) zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- ● Vehicle tilt angle . ● After 28 days, the indicator light will be nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse- ● Undue manipulation of the alarm. switched off to prevent the battery from quently closed, they will be automatically in- draining if the vehicle has been left parked ● Battery handling. cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle for a long period of time. The alarm system and the turn signals will flash accordingly In this case, the acoustic signals will go off remains activated. when the doors close. and the turn signal will flash for approximate- ● The alarm will trigger again if attempts are made to open another protection zone. ● The turn signal light will flash twice on ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated up opening and deactivating the alarm. to 10 times depending on the country. ● The alarm system can be activated or deactivated using the radio frequency remote con- ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos- Opening all the doors in manual mode trol ››› page 110. ing and activating the alarm. In vehicles without an alarm, when opening ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the driver door manually, all doors are the vehicle is locked from within using the When does the system trigger an alarm? central locking button  . opened. The system triggers an alarm, if the following ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat unauthorised actions are carried out when How to switch the alarm off then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor- the vehicle is locked: rectly. To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if ● Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the key in the opening direction, open the door the battery is disconnected or not working for vehicle key without switching on the ignition any reason. in the next 15 seconds (in certain markets,

1) With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection 112 Opening and closing

● The alarm is triggered immediately if one of The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow Note the battery cables is disconnected while the sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- ● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is alarm system is active. ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched on. In order to activate it, all the doors and activated without the volumetric sensor function, relocking will activate the alarm with all the rear lid must be closed. its functions, except the volumetric sensor. Vehicle interior monitoring and anti- If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior This function is reactivated when the alarm is data Technical tow system* monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must switched on again, unless it is deliberately be done each time that the vehicle is locked; switched off. Monitoring or control function incorporated if not, they will be automatically switched on. ● If the alarm has been triggered by the volu- in the anti-theft alarm* which detects unau- metric sensor, this will be indicated by a The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- flashing of the warning lamp on the driver Advice thorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- tow system should be switched off if animals sound. door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, different to the flash indicating the alarm is their movements will trigger the alarm) or activated. Activation when, for example, the vehicle is transported ● The vibration of a mobile phone left inside – It is automatically switched on when the or has to be towed with only one axle on the the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior anti-theft alarm is activated. ground. monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors

react to movements and shakes inside the ve- Operation Deactivation False alarms hicle. – Open the vehicle with the key, either me- Interior monitoring will only operate correctly ● If on activating the alarm, any door or the chanically or by pressing the  button on if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa- the remote control. The time period from serve related legal requirements. ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the when the door is opened until the key is in- anti-tow system will only be activated once all the doors are closed (including the rear serted into the contact should not exceed The following cases may cause a false alarm: lid). Emergencies 15 seconds, otherwise the alarm will be ● Open windows (partially or fully), triggered. ● Tilting panoramic sunroof open (partially or – Press the button  on the remote control completely), twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen- Boot hatch ● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, sors will be deactivated. The alarm system

such as loose papers, items hanging from Safety remains activated. Opening and closing the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- Read the additional information carefully tow system are automatically switched on ›››  page 9 » again next time the vehicle is locked. 113 Operation

WARNING Electric windows Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated. ● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of accident or injury. Opening and closing of the electric Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors ● The rear lid must not be opened when the windows* are deactivated. reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights. WARNING ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down Observe the safety warnings ››› in Set of with your hand on the rear window. The glass keys on page 110. could smash. Risk of injury! ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. result in injury. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv- ● Never close the rear lid without observing ing. and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could ● Never allow children to play in or around cause serious injury to you and third parties. the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected Make sure that no one is in the path of a win- to extremely high and low temperatures, de- dow. pending on the time of year, thus causing se- Fig. 124 Detail of the driver door: controls for ● If the ignition is switched on, the electric rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal the front and rear windows (5-door vehicles equipment could be activated with risk of in- consequences. Close and lock both the rear with front and rear electric windows). jury, for example, in the electric windows. lid and all the other doors when you are not ● The doors can be locked using the remote using the vehicle. Read the additional information carefully control key. This could become an obstacle ● Closing the rear lid without observing and ›››  page 11 for assistance in an emergency situation. ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury The front and rear electric windows can be ● to you and to third parties. Make sure that no Therefore always take the key with you one is in the path of the rear lid. operated by using the controls on the driver when you leave the vehicle. door. The other doors each have a switch for ● ● The electric windows will work until the ig- Never drive with the rear lid open or half- their own window. closed, exhaust gases may enter into the in- nition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened. terior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! Always close the windows fully if you park ● ● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that if the key is left inside. You can use the electric windows for approx. they have been disabled. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition. 114 Opening and closing

Note – Close the window as far as it will go by lift- ● If there is no obvious reason why the win- ing and holding the electric window switch. dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by If the window is not able to close because it pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- is stiff or because of an obstruction, the win- – Release the switch and then lift it again for dow closes with maximum force. The roll- dow will automatically open again 1 second. This will re-enable the automatic back function is now deactivated. ››› page 115. If this happens, check why the function. Technical data Technical window could not be closed before attempt- If more than 10 seconds pass, the window If you push (or pull) a button to the first ing to close it again. will open fully when you operate one of the stage, the window will open (or close) until buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. you release the button. If you push or lift the button briefly to the second stage, the win- One-touch opening and closing* WARNING dow will open (one-touch opening) or close Advice ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can One-touch opening and closing means you (one-touch closing) automatically. If you op- result in injury. do not have to hold down the button. erate the button while the window is opening or closing, it stops at this position. ● Always take the ignition key with you when Buttons ››› Fig. 124 1 , 2 , 4 and 5 have leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to two positions for opening windows and two be gone for a short time. Please ensure that for closing them. This makes it easier to open Roll-back function children are never left alone inside the vehi-

and close windows to the desired position. cle. Operation The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- ● The electric windows will work until the ig- One-touch closing jury when the electric windows close. nition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened. – Pull up the window button briefly up to the ● If a window is obstructed when closing au- second position. The window closes fully. ● Closing the windows without observing and tomatically, the window stops at this point ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury and lowers immediately ››› . One-touch opening to you and third parties. Make sure that no ● Next, check why the window does not close one is in the path of a window. Emergencies – Push down the window button briefly up to before attempting it again. ● Never allow people to remain in the vehicle the second position. The window opens ● If you try within the following 10 seconds when you close the vehicle from the outside. fully. The windows cannot be opened even in an and the window closes again with difficulty emergency. or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- Resetting one-touch opening and closing ● ing will stop working for 10 seconds. The roll-back function does not prevent fin- Safety – The automatic open and close function will gers or other parts of the body getting ● not work if the battery has been temporari- If the window is still obstructed, the win- pinched against the window frame. Risk of ly disconnected. The function can be re- dow will stop at this point. accident. stored as follows: 115 Operation

Convenience opening/closing* The panoramic/tilting sunroof is opened and can be locked using the remote control key. closed by using the switch when the ignition This could become an obstacle for assistance Using the door lock* is switched on. in an emergency situation. – Hold the key in the door lock of the driver Always close the panoramic/tilting sunroof ● The tilting sunroof continues to function door in either the locking or the unlocking fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unat- until one of the front doors is opened and the key removed from the ignition. position until all windows are either tended ››› . opened or closed. ● Ensure that no object and/or end is be- The tilting sunroof can be operated for up to tween the glass and the sunroof when the – Release the key to interrupt this function. about ten minutes after the ignition has been one-touch opening/closing function is reset. switched off, provided the driver door and Using the remote control the front passenger door are not opened. – Keep the locking/unlocking button pressed Convenience closing* for the electric window risers to Sun visor open/close; if you stop pressing the but- The sun visor is opened and closed manually Using the door lock ton, the window raising/lowering function (independently of the panoramic/tilting sun- is stopped. – Hold the key in the door lock of the driver roof). door in the locking position until the tilting – If the automatic raising is stopped and im- sunroof is closed. mediately after, the opening button is kept WARNING – Release the key to interrupt this function. pressed, the window risers will lower. ● Incorrect use of the tilting sunroof can result in injury. – Once the windows are completely closed, Using the remote control the turn signals will flash. ● Never close the tilting sunroof without first checking that there are no obstructions. Risk – Push the lock button on the remote control of serious injury to you or others. Make sure for approximately 3 seconds. The tilting that no one is in the path of the tilting sun- sunroof closes. roof. Tilting panoramic roof* – Press the unlock button to interrupt the ● Always take the vehicle key with you when function. Opening or closing of the tilting pan- you leave the vehicle. oramic roof ● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to Read the additional information carefully the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could ›››  page 11 mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric tilting sunroof) with a risk of accident. The doors

116 Lights and visibility Roll-back function of the tilting panor- Lights and visibility Switching lights on and off amic sunroof* Read the additional information carefully The tilting panoramic sunroof has a roll-back Lights ›››  page 21 function which prevents larger objects get- The legal requirements regarding the use of Control lamps data Technical ting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll- vehicle lights in each country must be ob- back function does not prevent fingers get- served. ting pinched against the roof opening. The  It lights up tilting sunroof stops and opens again imme- The driver is personally responsible for the diately if it is obstructed when closing. Rear fog light switched on ››› page 118. correct use and adjustment of the lights in all

situations. Advice  It lights up WARNING Front fog lights* switched on ››› page 118. Never drive with just the side lights on, there is a risk of accident. The side lights are not  It lights up bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able Left or right turn signal.

The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal to see you. Always use your dipped beam Operation is faulty. headlights if it is dark or if visibility is poor.

 It lights up Note ● The dipped beam headlights will only work Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 119. with the ignition on. The side lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.

Several warning and control lamps light up Emergencies for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ● If the lights are left on after the key has ed on, signalling that the function is being been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi- verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ble warning sounds while the driver door re- onds. mains open. This is a reminder to switch the lights off.

WARNING ● The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind Safety you. You should use the rear fog light only Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning when visibility is very poor. For this reason, symbols on page 99. when you exceed approximately 60 km/h (38 »

117 Operation

mph), a warning will appear on the the ignition, the audible warning will only WARNING instrument panel: Turn off the fog sound if the light knob is in position  or . The side lights or daytime driving lights are light!. ● If the daylight driving automatic light func- not bright enough to illuminate the road ● The use of the lighting described here is tion is switched on, the front fog lights or ahead and to ensure that other road users are subject to the relevant statutory require- rear fog light cannot be switched on in addi- able to see you. ments. tion. ● Always use your dipped beam head lights if ● The use of the lighting described here is it is raining or if visibility is poor. subject to the relevant statutory require- ● The rear lights do not come on with the ments. Automatic lighting* daytime driving light. A vehicle which does ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in not have the rear lights on may not be visible Activation front of the sensor. This may cause disrup- to other drivers in the darkness, if it is rain- tions or faults in the automatic lighting sys- – Rotate the switch to the  position, this ing or in conditions of poor visibility. tem. indication will light up. ● The rain sensor switches on the dipped Note beam headlights when the windscreen wipers Deactivation have been operating continuously for a few See legal requirements for each country. – Turn the light switch to . seconds and it switches the lights off when the continuous or interval wipe is switched Automatic lighting off for some minutes. Fog lights If automatic headlight control is switched on, dipped beam headlights are automatically switched on by a photosensor if you drive in- Daytime running lights to a tunnel, for example.  ››› table on page 2 WARNING The daytime running lights are enabled auto- ● Even if the automatic headlight control is switched on, the dipped beam headlights will matically when the ignition is switched on. not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the Daytime running lights are signalling devices dipped beam must be switched on manually. for improving road safety. The lights are built into the headlights and come on each time Note the ignition is turned on if the light switch is Fig. 125 Dash panel: light control. in position 0 or . It is automatically ● For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is removed from switched off when the dipped beam lights are turned on. 118 Lights and visibility

Switching on the front fog lights* Convenience turn signals trol lamp flashes at double speed. If the trail- ● Turn the switch from position   or  For the convenience turn signals, move the er turn signal bulbs are defective, the control to the first stop and pull it. The symbol  in lever as far as possible upwards or down- lamp  does not light up. Change the bulb. the light switch lights up. wards and release the lever. The turn signal ● The main beam headlights can only be will flash three times. switched on if the dipped beam headlights Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with are already on. The warning lamp  then data Technical The convenience turn signals are activated comes on in the instrument panel. front fog lights) and deactivated in the Easy Connect system ● The headlight flasher comes on for as long ● Turn the lights control from position   via the  key and the Setup function button as you pull the lever – even if no other lights or  to the second stop and pull it in . ››› ››› page 99 are switched on. The warning lamp  then Switching lights on and off on page 117. A In vehicles that do not have the correspond- comes on in the instrument panel. Advice lamp on the control and warning lamps panel ing menu, this function can be deactivated in ● lights up. When the parking lights are switched on, a specialised workshop. the headlight and the tail light on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with WARNING parking lights will only work if the key is re- no front fog lights) moved from the ignition. If said light is on, an The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk ● audible warning will be emitted while the Turn the light control to the end from posi- of accident! Never use the main beam head-

  driver door is open. Operation tion or and pull it. A lamp on the con- lights or the headlight flasher if they could trol and warning lamps panel lights up. dazzle other drivers. ● If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver Note Turn signal and main beam lever door is opened. This is intended as a remind- ● If the convenience turn signals are operat- er to switch off the turn signal, unless you wish to leave the parking light on. Read the additional information carefully ing (three flashes) and the other convenience

›››  page 22 turn signals are switched on, the active part Emergencies stops flashing and only flashes once in the new part selected. Parking lights  Coming Home/Leaving Home Func- ● The turn signals only work when the ignition* ● Switch the ignition off and remove the key tion is switched on. The corresponding warn- from the lock. ing lamp  or  flashes in the instrument

The Coming Home function is controlled man- Safety ● Move the turn signal lever up or down to panel. The control lamp  flashes when the ually. The Leaving Home function is control- turn the right or left-hand parking lights on, turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is led with a photosensor. respectively. correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the con- If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side and dipped » 119 Operation

lights, the tail lights and the number plate ● the photosensor detects “darkness”. Adaptive headlights* (for driving light will light up to provide assistance. round bends) The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the Coming home function following cases: The Coming Home function is activated by ● If the time period for the delay in switching switching off the ignition and briefly flashing off the headlights has ended the lights. When the driver door is opened, ● If the vehicle is locked again. the Coming Home lighting comes on. If the ●  driver door is already open when the lights If the light switch is turned to position . are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting ● If the ignition is switched on. comes on immediately. Manual Leaving Home function When the last door of the vehicle or the rear lid is closed, the Coming Home function In vehicles without an automatic headlight starts and the switching off the headlights is system (light sensor), if the manual Coming Fig. 126 Cornering lighting using adaptive headlights. delayed. Home function is activated when leaving the car, upon returning to the car and unlocking The Coming Home lighting switches off in the it the manual Leaving Home function will be When driving around bends, the headlights following cases: activated automatically. will light the most important areas of the road. ● On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off the lights af- Note This cornering light gives better illumination ter all the vehicle doors and the rear lid have ● To activate the Coming/Leaving home func- of the side of the road and the corner area. been closed. tion, the rotary light switch must be in posi- The dynamic lighting is controlled automati-  cally according to speed and the steering ● If, 30 seconds after being connected, any tion and the light sensor must detect darkness. wheel angle. doors or the rear lid remain open. ● If the ignition key is removed while the ● If the light switch is turned to position . The two main headlights move at different lights are on, the lights flash briefly and the angles to avoid that the front of the vehicle is ● If the ignition is switched on. driver door opens, no audible warning is left completely in the dark. heard, since with the Coming Home function on, the lights are automatically switched off Automatic Leaving Home function Note after a period of time (except when the light The Leaving Home function is activated when switch is in position  or . The system operates from a speed of about the vehicle is unlocked if: 10 km/h (6 mph). ● the light control is in position  and 120 Lights and visibility

Fog lights with cornering function* Instrument and switch lighting, head- headlights in good time when light condi- light range control tions become poor. This is an additional light source to dipped beam headlights to light up the road as a Headlight range control bend is taken. By using the electrical headlight range con- The cornering light operates with the lights trol you can adjust the headlight range to the data Technical switched on and when driving at less than load level that is being carried in the vehicle 40 Km/h (25 mph). Ignition occurs by turning ››› Fig. 127. This way, it is possible to avoid the steering or connecting the turn signal. dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same time, by using the correct Forward gear headlight settings, the driver has the best Advice possible lighting for the road ahead. ● If the steering wheel is turned to the right, or the right-hand turn signal operated, the The headlights can only be adjusted when right-hand fog light turns on. Fig. 127 Dash panel: headlight range control the dipped beam is switched on. Turn the wheel downwards to lower the headlight ● If the steering wheel is turned to the left, or Instrument and switch lighting the left-hand turn signal operated, the left- beam from the basic setting 0. The lighting level of instruments, controls hand fog light turns on. Operation and displays can be adjusted through the in- Dynamic headlight range control In reverse, both fog lights turn on. fotainment system with the CAR button and Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs (xenon the SETUP function button ›››  page 24. bulbs) are equipped with dynamic headlight Note The instrument lighting (some dials and nee- range control. When you switch on the lights, When the fog lamps are on, the cornering dles), the centre console lighting and the their range regulates itself according to the function is activated and both headlights are lighting of the displays are regulated by a vehicle load.

continuously on. photodiode incorporated in the instrument Emergencies Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs do not panel. have headlight range control. The instrument lighting (needles) is switched on when the ignition is on and the light is off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto- Hazard warning lights  matically as the daylight starts to fade. It Safety goes out completely when ambient light is Read the additional information carefully very low. This function is intended to remind ›››  page 22 » the driver to switch on the dipped beam

121 Operation

The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your sta- Glove compartment light the attention of other road users to your vehi- tionary vehicle. When opening the glove compartment on the cle in emergencies. ● Due to the high temperatures that the cata- passenger side, the glove compartment light If your vehicle breaks down: lytic converter can reach, never park in an will automatically turn on and will turn off area where the catalytic converter could come upon closure. 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from into contact with highly inflammable materi- moving traffic. als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This Ambient light* 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard could start a fire. warning lights ››› .  ››› table on page 2 Note 3. Switch the ignition off. The ambient lighting lights up the central ● The battery will run down if the hazard console area and the footwell area. 4. Apply the handbrake. warning lights are left on for a long time, They will switch on fully when the doors are 5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; even if the ignition is switched off. opened and will decrease in intensity while for an automatic gearbox, move the gear ● The use of the hazard warning lights de- driving when the dipped beam headlight is lever to P. scribed here is subject to the relevant statu- on. tory requirements. 6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten- The intensity of the ambient light* can be ad- tion of other road users to your vehicle. justed using the Easy Connect menu (see 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when Adjusting Lights > Interior light- you leave the vehicle. Interior lights ing ›››  page 24).

All turn signals flash simultaneously when Interior and reading lights Note the hazard warning lights are switched on. If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in-   The two turn signal turn signal lamps Read the additional information carefully terior lights will be switched off after approx. and the turn signal lamp in the switch  will ›››  page 23 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has flash at the same time. The simultaneous been removed and the courtesy light position hazard warning lights also work when the ig- Luggage compartment lighting selected. This prevents the battery from dis- nition is switched off. charging. The light is activated when the rear lid is open, even when the ignition and lights are WARNING turned off. For this reason, ensure that the ● The risk of an accident increases if your ve- rear lid is always closed. hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw

122 Lights and visibility

Visibility function is possible, coming back on when Windscreen wiper and rear win- normal operating conditions are re-establish- dow wiper systems Heated rear window  ed. Control lamp* Sun visors data Technical  It lights up

Windscreen wiper fluid level too low

This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity ››› page 207. Advice

Windscreen wipers Fig. 128 Centre console: heated rear window switch. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 23 Operation The heated rear window only works when the Fig. 129 Sun visor on the driver side. engine is running. When it is switched on, a WARNING lamp lights up on the switch. The sun visors for the driver and the front ● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili- After approximately 8 minutes, the heating passenger can be pulled out of their central ty and safety levels while driving. supports and turned towards the doors in the device of the rear window switches off auto- ● In cold conditions you should not use the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 129. Never pull matically. wash/wipe system unless you have warmed them downwards. the windscreen with the heating and ventila- Emergencies For the sake of the environment The driver sun visor has compartments for tion system. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and The heated rear window should be switched cards, and the passenger sun visor has a obscure your view of the road. off as soon as the glass is demisted. By sav- vanity mirror with a cover*. ing electrical power you can also save fuel. ● Always note the corresponding warnings Note ›››  page 54. » Safety Note Incorrect use of the sun visor (e.g. pulling them downwards once they are open) may re- To avoid possible damage to the battery, an sult in broken hinges. This damage is not cov- automatic temporary disconnection of this ered by the vehicle warranty. 123 Operation

WARNING ● If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen Switching on the interval wipe wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically The rain sensor* may not detect enough rain – Press the lever forward to position 6 change to a lower position speed. The set to switch on the wipers. ››› Fig. 130. The wiper will wipe the window speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls approximately every 6 seconds. ● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually away. when water on the windscreen obstructs visi- ● The windscreen will be wiped again after bility. Switching off the interval wipe function approximately five seconds once the “automatic wash/wipe system” has been activa- – Pull the lever back from position 6 toward CAUTION ted, provided the vehicle is moving (drip func- the steering wheel. The wiper will continue tion). If you activate the wipers less than 3 to function for a short period if you switch In icy conditions, always check that the wiper seconds after the drip function, a new wash off whilst the wipers are in motion. blades are not frozen to the glass before us- sequence will begin without performing the ing the wipers for the first time. If you switch last wipe. For the “drip” function to work on the windscreen wipers when the wiper Switching on the window wiper and washer again, you have to turn the ignition off and blades are frozen to the windscreen, you system then on again. could damage both the wiper blades and the – Press the lever fully forwards to position 7 ● wiper motor. Do not put stickers on the windscreen in ››› Fig. 130 . The wiper and washer operate front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sen- at the same time. The rear window wash sor disruption or faults. Note system will function as long as you hold the lever in this position. ● The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on. Rear window wiper – Release the lever. The washer system stops ● The heat output of the heated jets* is con- and the wipers continue until the end of trolled automatically when the ignition is the cycle. switched on, depending upon the outside – Move the lever towards the steering wheel temperature. to switch off. ● In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only work in inter- WARNING val/rain sensor mode when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed. ● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and safety levels while driving. ● When the interval wipe function is on, the intervals are directly proportional to the ● Always note the corresponding warnings speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed ›››  page 54. the shorter the intervals. Fig. 130 Windscreen wiper lever: rear window wiper. 124 Lights and visibility

CAUTION Note window is retracted and there are no other objects preventing light from reaching the in- In icy conditions, always check that the wiper ● To ensure that the headlight washers work terior rear vision mirror. blade is not frozen to the glass before using properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders in the wiper for the first time. If you switch on the bumper free of snow and remove any ice ● If you have to stick any type of sticker on the wiper when the wiper blade is frozen to with a de-icer spray. the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-daz- data Technical the glass, this could damage both the wiper ● To remove water, the windscreen wipers zle function from working well or even from blade and the wiper motor. will be activated from time to time, the head- working at all. light washers will be activated every three cy- Note cles.

● The rear window wiper will only work when Folding in the exterior mirrors man- Advice the ignition is switched on. ually ● Depending on the version of the model, Rear view mirrors when you engage reverse gear and with the The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol- headlight wiper activated, this can start a Interior mirror ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to- wipe. wards the vehicle. It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see

clearly through the rear window. Note Operation Headlight washer* Before washing the vehicle with an automatic Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid The headlight washers clean the headlight function* damage. lenses. The anti-dazzle function is activated every The headlight washers are activated auto- time the ignition is switched on. matically when the windscreen washer is When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the Emergencies used and the window wiper lever is pulled to- interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- wards the steering wheel for at least 1.5 sec- matically according to the amount of light it onds – provided the dipped beam headlights receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- or main beams are switched on. Clean off led if reverse gear is engaged. stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the headlights at regular intervals, for instance when Safety Note filling the fuel tank. ● The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun blind* for the rear

125 Operation

Electric exterior mirrors* Heated exterior mirrors* ● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to es- – Press the demisting button  ››› Fig. 128 timate distances to vehicles behind you. ● Make sure that you do not get your finger – The mirrors demist for some minutes to trapped between the mirror and the mirror prevent draining the battery unnecessarily. base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of – If necessary, press the button again to re- injury! peat the function. – The exterior mirror heating is not activated For the sake of the environment in temperatures above approximately The exterior mirror heating should be switch- +20°C (+68°F). ed off when it is no longer needed. Other- wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste. Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically* Fig. 131 Exterior mirror controls. – Turn the control ››› Fig. 131 to position  to Note Read the additional information carefully fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al- ● If the electrical adjustment ever fails to op- ›››  page 13 ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are erate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by driving through an automatic car wash. The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass. This will help prevent damage. the rotary knob in the driver door. ● In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors, the following points should be observed: if, Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex- Basic setting of exterior mirrors due to an external force (e.g. being knocked tended position* while manoeuvring), the adjustment of the 1. Turn knob Fig. 131 to position L (left ex- ››› – Turn the knob to position L or R to return mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have terior mirror). the exterior mirrors to their original posi- to be fully folded electrically. Do not readjust the rear vision mirror housing by hand, as 2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri- tion ››› . this will interfere with the mirror adjuster or mirror so that you have a good view to function. the rear of the vehicle. WARNING ● The rear vision mirrors can be adjusted sep- 3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior ● Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the arately or simultaneously, as described mirror). field of vision however the objects appear above. smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you ● The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors 4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the ex- use these mirrors to estimate the distance to will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h terior mirror so that you have a good view vehicles behind you when changing lane, you (25 mph). to the rear of the vehicle ››› . could make a mistake. Risk of accident.

126 Seats and head restraints

Seats and head restraints backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater Vehicles without the Easy-Entry function the risk of injury due to improper positioning – To fold the backrest, pull the lever 1 up- Adjusting the seat and head re- of the belt web! wards and push the backrest forwards. ● Exercise caution when securing the seat – To unfold the backrest, push it back. straints height into forwards/backwards position. In- juries can be caused if the seat height is ad- data Technical Vehicles with the Easy-Entry function Adjusting the front seats justed without due care and attention. ● To move the seat forwards and backwards, – To fold the backrest, pull the lever 1 up- Read the additional information carefully pull upwards and not sideways on the lever, wards and push the backrest forwards. You ›››  page 12 as the force exerted on it in that direction can push the seat forwards at the same

could damage it. time to make entry to the rear seats easier. Advice WARNING – To unfold the backrest, first move the seat The safe driving chapter contains important completely back. information, tips, suggestions and warnings Folding and lifting the backrest of the that you should read and observe for your front seats The Easy-Entry function facilitates the access own safety and the safety of your passengers to the vehicle rear seats. Before lifting the 3 Applies to vehicles with 3 doors: ››› page 56. backrest, return the seat to the original position. The seat inserts when the backrest is lif- Operation WARNING ted. ● Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting position. Risk of accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when Emergencies the vehicle is stationary. ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger in case of a sudden braking or an accident, never drive with the backrest Fig. 132 Front seats: lever for folding down tilted towards the rear. The maximum protec- the backrest. tion of the seat belt can be achieved only Safety when the backrests are in an upright position Read the additional information carefully and the driver and front passenger have prop- ›››  page 12 erly adjusted their seat belts. The further the

127 Operation

Adjusting or disassembling the head – Make sure that the head restraint engages Note securely in one of its positions ››› page 60. restraints ● To fit and remove the rear head restraints, gently tilt the seat backrest forwards. Removing the head restraint ● When fitting the head restraints again, in- – Push the head restraint up as far as it will sert the tubes as far as possible into the go. guides without pressing the button. – Press the button ››› Fig. 133 (arrow). – Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button. Seat functions

Fitting the head restraint Heated seats*  – Insert the head restraint into the guides on Fig. 133 Adjusting and removing the head re- the corresponding backrest. straints. – Push head restraint down. Read the additional information carefully  – Adjust the head restraint to suit body size ››› page 12 ››› page 60.

Adjusting height (front seats) WARNING – Press the button on the side and pull up- ● Never drive if the head restraints have been wards to the desired position. removed. Risk of injury. – To lower the head restraint, press the but- ● Never drive if the head restraints are in an ton and push head restraint downwards. unsuitable position (the lowest position) as Fig. 134 Front seat heating switch. there is a risk of serious injury. – Make sure that it engages securely into one The front seat cushions and backrests can be ● After refitting the head restraint, you must of its positions. heated electrically. always adjust it properly for height to achieve optimal protection. – Press the corresponding switch ››› Fig. 134 Adjusting height (rear seats) ● Please observe the safety warnings in ››› to switch on the seat heating. – Press the button on the side and pull up- in Correct adjustment of front head restraints – Press once to connect the heating at maxi- wards to the desired position. on page 60. mum force. The two LEDs illuminate – To lower the head restraint, press the but- ››› Fig. 134. After 15 minutes of high ton and push head restraint downwards. 128 Seats and head restraints

intensity, the upper LED goes out, the sys- Folding down the back seat – Lift the cushion 2 forwards in the direc- tem is deactivated for 2 minutes and is tion of the arrow. then reactivated at low intensity (the lower – Pull the release button ››› Fig. 136 in the di- LED remains on permanently). rection of the arrow and fold the backrest – Press the switch again to set the heating to forwards. minimum force. (The lower LED lights up). data Technical – Insert the head restraints in the spaces on – To disconnect the heating, press the switch the rear of the seat cushion which are visi- again. ble when the seat cushion is lowered.

CAUTION Folding seat forward Advice To avoid damaging the heating elements, – Remove the head restraints from the please do not kneel on the seat or apply Fig. 135 Folding up the rear seat cushion. spaces in the seat cushion. sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest. – Lift the backrest, and before securing it, replace the head restraints in the seat cushion, and then click the seat correctly onto Note the locking rails. Operation The seats are only heated electrically when – Once the backrest is locked, pull on the the engine is running. central seat belt or directly on the backrest to check that the backrest has properly engaged in position. – Check that the position lever is in neutral position. Emergencies Fig. 136 Button for unlocking the rear backrest. – Lower the cushion and push it backwards below the seat belt buckles. Folding seat down – Press the front part of the cushion down- – Remove the head restraint ››› page 128. wards. Safety – Pull the front edge of the seat cushion On split rear seats*, the backrest and cush- ››› Fig. 135 1 upwards in the direction of ion can be lowered and raised respectively in the arrow. two sections. »

129 Operation

WARNING Transport and practical The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever ››› Fig. 137. ● Please be careful when folding back the equipment backrest! Injuries can be caused if the seat This compartment can hold documents in A4 height is adjusted without due care and at- format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc. tention. Practical equipment Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD ● Do no trap or damage seat belts when rais- player is located in the glove compartment. ing the backrest. Glove compartment Separate operating instructions are enclosed ● After raising the backrest, check it has en- for this equipment in the corresponding In- gaged properly in position. Do this by pulling struction Manual. on the central seat belt or directly on the backrest and check that the position lever is WARNING in the neutral position. Always keep the storage compartment cover ● The three point automatic seat belt only closed while the vehicle is in motion in order works correctly when the backrest of the cen- to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sud- tral seat is correctly engaged. den braking or by an accident.

Storage compartment on the driver Fig. 137 Passenger side: glove compartment. side

Fig. 138 Glove compartment: storage compartment for instruction manual. Fig. 139 Compartment on the driver side

130 Transport and practical equipment

There is a storage compartment on the driver Storage pocket in the seat* Front drink holder* side

Storage compartment under the front seats* data Technical Advice

Fig. 141 Storage pocket. Fig. 142 Front drink holders in the centre console. There is a storage pocket on the rear of the front seats. In the central console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drinks holders ››› Fig. 142. Operation Fig. 140 Storage compartment under the right front passenger seat. Storage compartment in front door WARNING panel* ● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. To open During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres, when braking suddenly or in case of an acci- – The compartment is opened by pulling on In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot- dent, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scald- the lever and assisting it with your hand. tle, etc. can be stored. ing.

● Emergencies To close Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), since they could cause in- – Press the cover inwards until the closed jury in the case of an accident. drawer “clicks” into position. ● When travelling, the drinks holder should always be closed to prevent risk in the event

Note of sudden breaking or accident. Safety The storage drawer will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.

131 Operation

Rear drink holder* Front ashtray* Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 143 Drinks holder in the centre console. Fig. 144 Front ashtray. Fig. 145 Lighter.

On the rear part of the centre console, behind Opening and closing the ashtray – Press on the cigarette lighter ››› Fig. 145 to the handbrake, there is a drink holder* in- – To open the ashtray, lift the cover activate it ››› . stalled ››› Fig. 143. ››› Fig. 144. – Wait for the lighter to spring out. This drinks holder has a capacity for a bottle – To close, push the cover down. – Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the of up to 1 litre. cigarette on the glowing coil. Emptying the ashtray – Extract the ashtray and empty it. WARNING ● Improper use of the cigarette lighter can WARNING lead to serious injuries or start a fire. Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ● Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a negligence when using the cigarette lighter fire. can cause burns and serious injuries. ● The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children alone inside the vehicle.

132 Transport and practical equipment

Electrical power socket Note – Place heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage compartment ● The use of electrical appliances with the ››› Fig. 147. engine switched off will cause a battery discharge. – Place the heavy objects first. ● Before using any electrical accessories, see – Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening data Technical the instructions in ››› page 187. rings* ››› page 134. – Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or with non-elastic straps secured to the fas- Luggage compartment tening rings*. Advice Loading the luggage compartment WARNING Fig. 146 Front power socket. ● Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could cause serious inju- The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can ries. also be used for other electrical components ● Always stow objects in the luggage com- with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When partment and secure them with the fastening the engine is switched off, however, the vehi- Operation rings*. cle battery will discharge. For further informa- ● tion see ››› page 187. During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring vehicle occupants or even third parties. This WARNING increased risk of injury will be further in- The power sockets and the connected acces- creased if a loose object is struck by an inflat- sories will only operate when the ignition is ing airbag. If this happens, objects may

Fig. 147 Position heavy items as far forward Emergencies on or when the engine is running. Improper as possible. shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in- use of the sockets or electrical accessories jury. can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To All luggage and other loose objects must be ● Always keep all objects in the luggage com- avoid the risk of injury, never leave children safely secured in the luggage compartment. partment and use appropriate grips to secure alone inside the vehicle. Unsecured objects which shift back and forth them, particularly in the case of heavy ob- could affect safety or driving characteristics jects. Safety CAUTION of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity. ● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid allowed maximum weight. If said weights are – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage exceeded, the driving characteristics of the » damaging the sockets. compartment. 133 Operation

vehicle may change, leading to accidents, through ventilation slits in the side trim of Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying injuries and damage to the vehicle. the luggage compartment. Ensure that the unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this ● Please note that the centre of gravity may ventilation slots are never covered. shift when transporting heavy objects; this ● Straps for securing the load to the fasten- object generates a force corresponding to 20 may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- ing rings* are commercially available from ac- times its weight. That means that the effec- cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust cessory shops. tive weight of the object increases to approxi- your speed and driving style accordingly, to mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of avoid accidents. the injuries which might be sustained if this “object” strikes an occupant as it flies ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- Fastening rings* cially when the rear lid is open. Children through the interior of the vehicle. This in- could climb into the luggage compartment, creased risk of injury will be further increased closing the door behind them; they will be if a loose object is struck by an inflating air- trapped and run the risk of death. bag. ● Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and WARNING rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before ● If pieces of baggage or other objects are se- you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are cured to the fastening rings with inappropri- no adults or children in the vehicle. ate or damaged retaining cords, injuries ● Please observe the notes on the ››› page 56. could result in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents. CAUTION ● Never secure a child seat on the fastening Fig. 148 Location of fastening rings in lug- rings. Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe gage compartment. against the wires of the heating element in the heated rear window and cause damage. There may be four fastening rings included in the luggage compartment for fastening luggage and other objects Fig. 148 (arrows). Note ››› ● The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- – Always use suitable and undamaged straps ing to the load. When necessary check the to secure luggage and other objects to the tyre pressures on the label located on the in- fastening rings ››› in Loading the lug- side fuel tank flap ››› page 210. gage compartment on page 133. ● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce – Pull up the fastening rings to attach the fogging of the windows. Used air escapes straps.

134 Transport and practical equipment

Rear shelf ● If the luggage compartment is overloaded, tighten the bolts and check them at regular remove the tray. intervals. ● Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load Note of 40 kg is permitted for each roof rack system support bar, the load must be distrib- ● Ensure that, when placing items of clothing uted evenly along the entire length. However, data Technical on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi- the maximum load permitted for the entire bility is not reduced. roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor the total weight recommended for the entire vehicle. See the Roof rack/roof luggage rack* “Technical Data” section. Advice ● When transporting heavy or large objects Fig. 149 Rear shelf. Introduction on the roof, any change in the normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of Removing the shelf Please observe the following points if you in- gravity or an increased wind resistance must – Unhook the loops ››› Fig. 149 B from tend to carry loads on the roof: be taken into account. For this reason, a suit- housings A . able speed and driving style must be used. ● For safety reasons, only luggage racks and Operation ● On vehicles fitted with a sliding/tilting sun- – Extract the cover from its slot, in its rest po- accessories supplied by SEAT Official Serv- roof*, make sure it does not hit the load on sition and pull outwards. ices are recommended. the roof upon opening. ● It is essential that you follow the assembly WARNING instructions included with the bars exactly, Do not place heavy or hard objects on the being especially careful to position front and rear shelf, because they will endanger the ve- rear luggage compartment cover bars on the hicle occupants in case of sudden braking. special housings in the longitudinal bars. Emergencies You must also respect their position accord- CAUTION ing to the direction of travel indicated in the ● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the assembly manual. Not following these in- rear shelf is correctly fitted. structions may damage the bodywork. Safety ● An overloaded luggage compartment could ● Pay special attention to the tightening tor- mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat- que of the attachment bolts and check them ed and it may be bent or damaged. following a short journey. If necessary, re-

135 Operation

Attach the cross bars of the roof carri- boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can ● Check threaded joints and attachments er system be acquired at SEAT dealerships. travelling and if necessary tighten them after Always secure the crossbars and the roof car- you have travelled a short distance. When rier system properly. Always take the assem- making long trips, check the threaded joints whenever you stop for a rest. bly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system in question into ● Always fit the special roof carrier systems account. correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc. ● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or Ibiza Model roof carrier system. The front and rear attachment points 1 and 2 are only visible when the doors are open Note ››› Fig. 150. Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier Fig. 150 Ibiza model: attachment points for Ibiza SC Model system carefully and keep them in the vehi- the roof railings for the roof carrier system. cle. The front attachment points 1 are only visible when the doors are open; the rear attachment points 3 are marked on the top edge of the side window with arrow heads ››› Fig. 151.

WARNING Incorrect attachment and use of the crossbars and the roof carrier system may cause the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries. Fig. 151 Ibiza SC model: attachment points ● Always take the manufacturer assembly infor the roof railings for the roof carrier system. structions into account. ● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys- The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe- tem when they are in perfect condition and cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons, are properly secured. special fixtures must be used to safely trans- ● Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or system properly.

136 Air conditioning

Air conditioning so as to maintain good visibility of everything prevent further damage and have it checked outside. by a specialised workshop. Heating, ventilation and cool- ● The maximum heat output required to de- ● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- frost windows as quickly as possible is only cialist knowledge and special tools. There- ing available when the engine has reached its fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle normal running temperature. Only drive when to a specialised workshop. data Technical General notes you have good visibility. ● Always ensure that you use the heating Note Read the additional information carefully system, fresh air system, air conditioner and ● ›››  page 39 the heated rear window to maintain good visi- If the humidity and temperature outside the

bility to the outside. vehicle are high, condensation can drip off Advice the evaporator in the cooling system and ● Pollution filter Never leave the air recirculation on for a form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is The pollution filter (a combined particulate long period of time. If the cooling system is normal and does not indicate a leak. switched off and air recirculation mode filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar- switched on, the windows can mist over very ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the rier against impurities in the outside air, in- quickly, considerably limiting visibility. windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en- cluding dust and pollen. sure heating and cooling are not impaired, ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is and to prevent the windows from misting For the climate control system to work with not required. over. Operation maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must ● be replaced at the specified intervals in the The air from the vents flows through the ve- WARNING hicle interior and is extracted by slots in the Maintenance Programme. Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re- luggage compartment designed for this pur- If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due duce driver concentration possibly resulting pose. Therefore, you should avoid obstruct- to use in areas reaching very high pollution in a serious accident. ing these slots with any kind of object. levels, the pollen filter must be changed ● The air conditioner operates most effective- ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or Emergencies more frequently than stated in the Service use the air recirculation for long periods of ly with the windows and the sliding/tilting Schedule. time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be sunroof* closed. However, if the temperature refreshed. inside the vehicle is excessive because of the WARNING sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by opening the windows for a short time. Reduced visibility through the windows in- CAUTION ● Safety creases the risk of serious accidents. Do not smoke while air recirculation mode ● If you suspect that the air conditioner is is on, as smoke drawn into the air condition- ● Always ensure that all windows are free of damaged, switch it off with the A/C button to ing system leaves residue on the evaporator, ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, producing a permanent unpleasant odour. »

137 Operation

● At low outside temperatures, the compres- ● When the engine is under extreme strain, ● If the vehicle interior has overheated due to sor switches off automatically and cannot be switch off the compressor for a moment. an excessive solar radiation, it is best to switched on even with the AUTO button. open the windows or doors to allow the hot ● It is advisable to turn on the air condition- air to escape. ing at least once a month, to lubricate the Economic use of the air conditioning ● While in motion, the air conditioning system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- should not be switched on if the windows or crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a When the air conditioning is switched on, the the sunroof* are open. Technical Service should be consulted to compressor consumes engine power and has check the system. influence on fuel consumption. Consider the ● To ensure correct operation, the grilles on following points in order to have the system both sides of the screen must not be obstruc- operating in the minimum possible time. ted.

Air outlets

Fig. 152 Air vents

138 Air conditioning

Air distribution ● Use turn controls A , B and C ››› Fig. 153  – Air distribution to the windscreen and to adjust the temperature, blower speed and the footwell. Symbol ››› page 139 Main air output through out- air distribution. C lets ● Press the D button to switch air recircula- WARNING  1, 2 tion mode on or off. When the function is ac- ● For your safety, the windows should never tivated, a warning light on the button is be fogged up or covered with snow or ice. data Technical  5 turned on. This is essential to ensure good visibility.  1, 2, 5 Please familiarise yourself with the correct Temperature operation of the heating and ventilation sys-  3, 4 tem, including the demist/defrost functions Switch A adjusts temperature. The desired

for the windows. Advice Outlets 3 and 4 can be closed or opened temperature inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature. Maxi- separately using the slats and the air flow di- Note rected as required. mum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is only available when ● Please consider the general notes the engine has reached its operating temper- ››› page 137. ature. Heating and fresh air Operation Blower Air recirculation  Controls The air flow can be set at four speeds with switch B . The blower should always be set Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells at the lowest speed when driving slowly. from entering the interior.

Air distribution Connecting the recirculation Control C for setting the flow of air in the re- In any position of rotary switch C except Emergencies quired direction. thaw:  – Air distribution towards the windscreen ● Press button D ››› Fig. 153 and the lamp in in order to demist. For safety reasons, it is the button will illuminate. not recommended to switch air recirculation Safety on. Disconnecting the recirculation Fig. 153 Heating controls on the dash panel.  – Air distribution to upper body. ● If the lamp is on, press button D and the lamp will go off, indicating that the entry of  – Air distribution to footwell outside air has been activated. » 139 Operation

If the rotary switch C ››› Fig. 153 is in the Interior heating – Open and turn outlets 4 towards side win- thaw position, the recirculation flap will al- – Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 153 dows. ways be open and air will always enter from A clockwise to select the desired tempera- the outside. Once the windows are demisted and as a pre- ture. ventive measure, the control C can be set in C If the rotary switch is switched from any – Turn blower switch B to any of the head position , thus obtaining greater comfort position to the thaw position, recirculation settings 1-4. while preventing the windows from misting will be automatically deactivated. again. – Set the airflow to the desired direction using air distribution control C . WARNING Heating ● In air recirculation mode, no cold air from – Open the relevant air outlets. Maximum heat output, which is needed to the outside enters the vehicle interior. The defrost the windows quickly, is only available windows can quickly fog over if the heating is Defrosting the windscreen when the engine has reached its operating switched off. Therefore, never leave the air re- temperature. circulation mode switched on for a long time – Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 153 (risk of accident). A clockwise to reach the maximum temperature. Note – Turn the blower switch B to setting 4. Remember that the temperature of the engine Vehicle ventilation or heating coolant should be optimum to ensure that the – Turn air distribution control to . heating system functions correctly (except in vehicles fitted with additional heating*). Ventilating the vehicle interior – Close outlet 3 . – Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 153 – Open and turn outlet 4 towards the side A anticlockwise. windows. – Turn blower switch B to any of the head settings 1-4. Keeping the windscreen and the side windows demisted – Set the airflow to the desired direction us- – Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 153 ing air distribution control C . A to the heating area. – Open the relevant air outlets. – Turn blower switch B to any of the head settings 2-3. – Turn air distribution control to . – Close outlets 3

140 Air conditioning

Air conditioning* ● Using the rotary switches A , B and C Vehicle interior heating or cooling ››› Fig. 154 you can adjust temperature, blow- system Controls er speed and air distribution. ● To switch a function on or off, press the ap- Interior heating propriate button D or E . When the function – Turn off the cooling system using the is activated, a red warning light on the but- ››› Fig. 154 A/C button (the button light data Technical ton is turned on. turns off).

To demist the windscreen – Turn the temperature selector A to set the desired temperature inside the vehicle. ● Turn air distribution to . – Turn the blower switch to any of the set- Advice ● Turn the fan control to one of the two levels tings 1-4. depending on the speed required. ● Rotate the temperature control to the de- – Set the air distribution control C to the air  sired level of comfort. flow configuration desired: (towards the Fig. 154 Air conditioning controls on the windscreen),  (towards the chest),  dash panel. ● Close outlets 3 (towards the footwell) and  (towards the ● Open and turn outlets 4 towards side win- windscreen and footwell areas). Operation A Temperature selector ››› page 141 dows. B Blower control. There are four speed set- Interior cooling tings for the blower. At low speed, it is WARNING – Turn off the cooling system using the A/C recommended to set the blower to a mini- For your safety, the windows should never be button (the button light turns on). mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is air. essential to ensure good visibility. Please fa- – Turn the temperature control switch until the desired interior temperature is reached. C Air distribution control ››› page 141 miliarise yourself with the correct operation Emergencies of the heating and ventilation system, includ- D Air recirculation button  ››› page 142 – Turn the blower switch to any of the set- ing the demist/defrost functions for the win- tings 1-4. E A/C button – Switches on the cooling dows. system ››› page 141 – Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration desired:  (towards the Note The air conditioning system only works when windscreen),  (towards the chest),  Safety the engine is running and the fan is switched Please consider the general notes. (towards the footwell) and  (towards the on. windscreen and footwell areas). »

141 Operation

Heating Air recirculation  In the thaw position of rotary switch C , the Maximum heat output, which is needed to entry of air into the vehicle interior is always defrost the windows quickly, is only available Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, from the outside. when the engine has reached its operating e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in temperature. queuing traffic, from entering the interior. WARNING If the rotary switch C ››› Fig. 154 is in the In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the Coolant system thaw position, the recirculation flap will al- outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air ways be open (button light off). conditioner is switched off, the windows can When the air conditioning is switched on, the quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the temperature and the air humidity go down. If the rotary switch C is switched from any air recirculation mode switched on for a long This way, if the outside humidity is extreme, position to the thaw position, recirculation time (risk of accident). the air conditioning prevents the misting of will be automatically deactivated. the windows and therefore, comfort is im- Note proved. Connecting the recirculation ● When engaging reverse gear, the air recir- If the air conditioning does not work, this In any position of rotary switch C except culation is connected automatically to pre- may be due to the following reasons: thaw: vent the entrance of exhaust gases in the vehicle on travelling backwards. The control ● The engine is stationary. ● D Press button ››› Fig. 154, the switch's lamp on the button  does not light up. ● lamp will light up, indicating that air recircu- The fan blower is switched off. ● lation inside the vehicle has been activated. If the temperature control is turned to the ● The outside temperature is lower than ap- coldest setting (blue point) and the A/C but- proximately +3°C (+37°F). ton is on, the “Air recirculation” function is Disconnecting the recirculation ● The air conditioning system compressor automatically activated in order to cool the vehicle faster using less energy, and its func- has been temporarily switched off because of In any position of rotary switch C except tion control lamp will light up. an increased engine coolant temperature. thaw: ● If the function is not deactivated by press- ● The air conditioner fuse is faulty. ● Press button D again and the button's ing the button, it will deactivate after approx- ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air lamp will go off, indicating that air recircula- imately 20 minutes. conditioning checked by a specialised work- tion from the outside has been activated. shop.

142 Air conditioning

Climatronic*

General notes Technical data Technical Advice

Fig. 155 Climatronic: controls. Operation

Read the additional information carefully Climatronic description Switching off the Climatronic ›››  page 39 Cooling only works if the following conditions ● Turn control 10 to the left until the seg- Climatronic automatically maintains a com- are met: ments of column 9 ››› Fig. 155 switch off. fortable temperature. To do so, it automati- ● The engine is running ● After 1 second has elapsed, turn the control cally regulates the supplied air temperature ● the outside temperature is above +2°C again to switch off the display. and the blower and air distribution levels. Emergencies (+36°F); The system also allows for the effect of sun- In order to ensure engines subject to heavy light, so there is no need for manual adjust- ● A/C 18 ››› Fig. 155 switched on. loads are cooled, the air conditioning com- ment. It also has a humidity sensor that pressor is switched off in the event of high helps to automatically demist the wind- Starting the Climatronic coolant temperatures. screen. The corresponding function will be switched Safety Recommended setting for all seasons of the Automatic operations ››› page 144 guaran- on when a button is pressed, turning on the year tee maximum comfort any time of year. air conditioning if it was switched off, with the exception of button 17 ››› Fig. 155 (recir- ● Set the required temperature. We recom- culation). mend +22 °C (72°F). » 143 Operation

● Press the AUTO button 13 ››› Fig. 155. ● Press the AUTO button 13 ››› Fig. 155 and Air recirculation ● Adjust vents 3 and 4 ››› page 138 so that AUTO displayed on the screen. the air flow is directed slightly upwards. Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, Automatic mode is switched off by pressing e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in the air distribution buttons or increasing or queuing traffic, from entering the interior. Change between degrees Centigrade and de- decreasing the blower speed. However, the grees Fahrenheit temperature remains regulated. Switching on air recirculation mode Keep the AUTO and A/C ››› Fig. 155 buttons held down for 2 seconds at the same time. ● Press button  17 ››› Fig. 155 and the  symbol is displayed on the screen. The data is displayed on the screen in the Adjusting the temperature units required. ● When you switch on the ignition, control 1 Switching off air recirculation mode Note ››› Fig. 155 can be used to set the required in- ● Press button  17 ››› Fig. 155 and the  ● A visit to the specialised service once a terior temperature. symbol disappears from the screen. year is recommended to clean the Climatronic system. It is possible to select interior temperatures WARNING from +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In this ● 11 The interior temperature sensor range the temperature is regulated automati- Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in ››› Fig. 155 is at the bottom. Do not cover it General notes on page 137. cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is with stickers or the like, as this could have a selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a negative effect on Climatronic operations. temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selected, Note “HI” is displayed on the screen. At both ex- If air recirculation mode remains on for 15 mi- tremes, Climatronic works at maximum cool- nutes, the  symbol will start to flash on Automatic mode ing or heating power, respectively. The tem- the screen to indicate prolonged air recircula- perature is not regulated. tion. If air recirculation is not switched off, Automatic mode is used to maintain a con- the symbol will continue to flash for about 5 In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu- stant temperature and demist the windows minutes. inside the vehicle. tion of the air flow from the outlets (particularly the footwells) and significant differen- Switching on automatic mode ces in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive people may catch cold. Blower selection ● Set the interior temperature between +16°C (+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F). Climatronic automatically regulates blower ● Adjust vents 3 and 4 ››› page 138 so that speed according to the interior temperature. the air flow is directed slightly upwards.

144 Driving

It is possible, however, to set the blower Driving could be engaged and vehicle steering would speed to suit requirements. not work. ● Turn control 10 ››› Fig. 155 counter-clock- Address wise (to lower the speed) or clockwise (to in- Note crease the speed). Introduction The ignition of the vehicle being towed must data Technical be switched on to prevent the steering wheel Climatronic will switch off when the blower The power steering is not hydraulic but elec- from locking and also to allow the use of the switches off. tromechanical. The advantage of this steer- turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and ing is that it foes not need flexible hydraulic washers. WARNING

pipes, hydraulic oil, pump, filter or other Advice Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in parts. The electromechanical system saves General notes on page 137. fuel. Whereas a hydraulic system needs con- Control lamp tinuous oil pressure, electromechanical steering only needs power when it is used. The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It Windscreen defrost In vehicles with electromechanical steering, should go out once the engine is started. the assisted steering function automatically

Switching on windscreen defrosting adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering Operation It lights up red ● Press the button  12 ››› Fig. 155. wheel torque and wheel orientation. The  power steering only works when the engine The electromechani- Have the steering checked im- Switching off windscreen defrosting is running. cal steering is dam- mediately by a specialised work- aged. shop. ● Press button  12 ››› Fig. 155 several WARNING times or press the AUTO button. If the power steering does not work, you will  It lights up yellow The temperature is regulated automatically. need much more strength to turn the wheel. Emergencies Electromechanical See a specialised workshop im- The air output is increased from vents 1 and This has a considerable effect on vehicle steering operation mediately and have the steering 2 ››› page 138. safety. is limited. checked. ● The power steering only works when the If the yellow warning lamp does engine is running. not light up again after the en-

gine is restarted and the vehicle Safety ● Never allow the vehicle to move when the has travelled a short distance, engine is switched off. you do not need to take it to a ● Never remove the key from the ignition specialised workshop. » while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock

145 Operation

 It lights up yellow Note Electromechanical steering Failure to heed the control lamps and corre- In vehicles with electromechanical steering, The 12-volt battery Take the vehicle for a short run the assisted steering function automatically was disconnected at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph). sponding text messages when they light up and has been recon- may result in damage to the vehicle. adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering nected. wheel torque and wheel orientation. The power steering only works when the engine is running.  It flashes yellow Information relating to different vehi- You should take into account that you will The steering column Turn the wheel a little to both cle processes. is tight. sides. need considerably more power than normal In order to make the vehicle more difficult to to steer the vehicle if the power steering is The steering column Remove the key from the ignition steal, you should always lock the steering be- not working correctly or at all. does not unlock or and switch the ignition back on. fore leaving the vehicle. lock. If necessary, check the messag- Power-assisted steering es displayed on the instrument panel display. Mechanical steering lock Power-assisted steering helps the driver in Do not drive on if the steering The steering column is locked when the key critical situations. In counter-steering, it as- column remains locked after the is removed from the ignition lock and the ve- sists by applying additional torque ››› . ignition has been switched on. Seek specialist assistance. hicle is stationary. WARNING WARNING Activating the steering lock Power-assisted steering, together with the ● Park the vehicle ››› page 149. ESC, helps the driver to control vehicle steer- If the warning lamps and the corresponding ing in critical situations. However, the driver ● messages are ignored when they light up, the Remove the ignition key. is ultimately responsible for steering the ve- vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci- ● Turn the steering wheel slightly until the hicle at all times. Power-assisted steering dents and severe injuries. steering lock has engaged. does not remove this responsibility. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messages. Deactivating the steering lock ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity ● Turn the steering wheel slightly to release and in a safe place. the lock. ● Insert the key in the ignition lock. ● Hold the steering wheel in this position and switch on the ignition.

146 Driving

Starting and stopping the en- Switching the ignition or the glow plug sys- ● Unsupervised use of the key could start the tem on 2 gine engine or any electrical system, such as the Turn the ignition key to this position and re- electric windows. This could result in serious lease it. If the key cannot be turned or it is injury. Ignition key positions difficult to turn from position 1 to position 2 , move the steering wheel from one side to CAUTION data Technical the other; this will release it. The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key position 3 ). Starting 3 The engine is started when the key is in this Advice position. Electrical devices with high power Electronic immobiliser “SAFE” consumption are switched off temporarily at the same time. The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig- thorised persons from driving the vehicle. nition key must be turned to position 1 . The Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates Fig. 156 Ignition key positions. repetitive start prevention lock of the igni- the electronic immobiliser automatically tion prevents possible damage to the starter when the key is inserted into the ignition. Operation Read the additional information carefully motor if the engine is already running. ›››  page 21 The electronic immobiliser will be activated WARNING again automatically as soon as you pull the Ignition switched off, steering lock 1 key out of the ignition lock. ● The ignition key must NOT be removed from In this position ››› Fig. 156, the ignition and the lock until the vehicle comes to a stand- The engine can only be started using a genu- the engine are OFF and the steering may be still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme- ine SEAT key with its correct code. diately blocked- Risk of accident! Emergencies locked. If the following message* is shown on the in- ● For the Steering lock to operate without the Always remove the key from the ignition strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it cannot be started. short period. This is especially important if locks with an audible sound. You should al- children or disabled people are left alone in The engine can, however, be started if the ways lock the steering wheel when you leave

the vehicle. They could accidentally start the appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used. » Safety your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle engine or work electrical equipment such as theft ››› . the electric windows, resulting in an accident.

147 Operation

Note WARNING engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions. A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured ● Never start or run the engine in unventila- if genuine SEAT keys are used. ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col- ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci- Starting diesel engines dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of Starting petrol engines consciousness and result in death. The engine can only be started using a genu- The engine can only be started using a genu- ● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the ine SEAT key with its correct code. engine is running. ine SEAT key with its correct code. – Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- ● Never use “cold start sprays”, they could – Move the gearbox lever to the neutral position and depress the clutch pedal thor- explode or cause the engine to run at high oughly and hold it in this position for the tion and depress the clutch pedal thor- revs. Risk of injury. oughly and hold it in this position for the starter to turn the engine on. starter to turn the engine on. – Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 156 CAUTION  – Turn the ignition key to the starting posi- 2 . The warning lamp will light for en- ● When the engine is cold, you should avoid tion . gine pre-heating. ››› page 147 high engine speeds, driving at full throttle – Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en- and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine – When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition gine starts; the starter motor must not run damage. key to position 3 to start the engine. Do on with the engine. ● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed not press the accelerator. more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un- – Release the ignition key as soon as the en- After starting a very hot engine, you may burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter gine starts. The starter motor should not need to slightly press down the accelerator. and damage it. turn at the same time. When starting a cold engine, it may be a little ● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve- noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- hicle in order to start it, you should first try to When starting a cold engine, it may be a little sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- start it using the battery of another vehicle. noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause Please observe and follow the notes on the sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- ›››  page 52, How to jump start. for concern. pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. If the engine does not start immediately, For the sake of the environment switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try If there are problems starting the engine, see again after half a minute. If the engine still Do not warm-up the engine by running the the ›››  page 52. does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off checked ››› page 80, Fuses. immediately, driving gently. This helps the

148 Driving

Glow plug system for the diesel engine Please observe and follow the notes on the brake operation cannot be performed, risk of To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat- ›››  page 52, How to jump start. accidents and serious injury may exist. tery, do not use any other major electrical ● The steering lock can be immediately equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heat- For the sake of the environment blocked once the key is removed from the ig- ing. nition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of Do not warm-up the engine by running the accident. data Technical Start the engine as soon as the glow plug engine with the vehicle stationary. You ● warning lamp goes out. should drive off as soon as you start the en- Power-assisted steering does not work gine. This helps the engine reach operating when the engine is off, and more strength is needed to turn the wheel. Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank temperature faster and reduces emissions. ● If the key is removed from the ignition lock

has been completely run dry Advice the steering lock could be engaged and vehi- If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, cle steering would not work. it may take longer than normal (up to one mi- Switching off the engine nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. CAUTION This is because the fuel system must elimi- – Stop the vehicle. nate air first. – Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 156 When the engine has been running under a 1 . heavy load for a long period, heat can accu-

WARNING mulate in the engine compartment and cause Operation After switching the engine off, the radiator engine damage. For this reason, idle the en- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Starting fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also gine for approximately 2 minutes before petrol engines on page 148. possible that the fan turns itself on once switching it off. more if the coolant temperature increases CAUTION due to the heat accumulated in the engine ● When the engine is cold, you should avoid compartment or due to its prolonged expo- Braking and parking high engine speeds, driving at full throttle sure to solar radiation. Emergencies and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage. WARNING Braking capacity and braking distance ● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- The efficiency of the brakes depends directly more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un- cle is completely stationary. on the brake pad wear. This wear depends to burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter ● The brake servo works only when the en- a great extent on the conditions under which Safety and damage it. gine is running. With the engine switched off, the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi- ● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve- more strength is needed to brake. As normal cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive hicle in order to start it, you should first try to short distances or have a sporty driving style, start it using the battery of another vehicle. we recommend that you have the thickness » 149 Operation

of your brake pads checked by technical serv- the brakes to overheat and the braking dis- WARNING ices more frequently than recommended in tance will increase. Apply and then release ● If the brake warning lamp does not go out the Maintenance Programme. the brakes alternately. or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af- ● Never let the vehicle run with the engine level in the reservoir is too low so there is a ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy switched off. The braking distance is in- risk of an accident ››› page 206, Brake fluid. rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef- creased considerably when the brake servo is Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake not active. technical assistance. discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in ● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is ● If the brake warning lamp lights up  to- this case, the brakes should be “dried” by subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can gether with the ABS lamp  this could be pressing the brake pedal several times. form in the brake system. This reduces the ef- due to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear ficiency of the brakes. wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This WARNING ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could cause the rear to break away. Risk of could restrict the airflow to the brakes and skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical Longer braking distances and faults in the cause them to overheat. Before purchasing assistance. brake system increase the risk of accidents. accessories please observe the relevant in- ● New brake pads must be run in and do not structions ››› page 187, Modifications. have the correct friction during the first ● If a brake system circuit fails, the braking 200 km. This reduced braking capacity may Handbrake distance will be increased considerably. Con- be compensated for by pressing on the brake tact a specialised workshop immediately and pedal a little harder, which also applies when avoid unnecessary journeys. the brake pads have to be changed further on. ● If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have been salted, Control lamp braking power may be lower than normal. Situations in which the warning lamp lights ● On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively up * used, they will overheat. Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce ● the brake fluid level is too low speed and change down into a lower gear or ››› page 206. range (depending on the type of transmis- ● there is a fault in the brake system. Fig. 157 Handbrake between the front seats. sion). Thus, make use of engine braking and relieve the brakes. This warning lamp can light up together with The handbrake should be applied firmly to ● Never let the brakes “drag” by applying the ABS system warning lamp. prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling light pressure. Continuous braking will cause away. Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when you park. 150 Driving

Applying the handbrake CAUTION ● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn – Pull the handbrake lever up firmly the front wheels so that they point away from Always apply the handbrake before you leave the kerb. ››› Fig. 157. the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, place the ● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the Releasing the handbrake gear lever in position P. handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear. Technical data Technical – Pull the lever up slightly and press the re- WARNING lease knob in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 157 and guide the handbrake lever Parking ● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury down fully ››› . when you leave your vehicle unattended. The handbrake should always be firmly ap- ● Never park where the hot exhaust system Advice Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so plied when the vehicle is parked. could ignite inflammable materials, such as there is less risk of driving off with it still en- dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc. gaged ››› . Always note the following points when parking the vehicle: ● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in The handbrake warning lamp  lights up the vehicle when it is locked. They would be when the handbrake is applied and the igni- – Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off – Apply the handbrake. an emergency. In the event of an emergency,

when the handbrake is released. Operation – Put it in 1st gear. locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle occupants. WARNING – Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel ● Never leave children alone in the vehicle. ● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi- They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex- slightly to engage the steering lock. cle when it is in motion. The braking distance ample, by releasing the handbrake or the is considerably longer, because braking is – Always take you keys with you when you gearbox lever. only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci- leave the vehicle ››› . ● Depending on weather conditions, it may

dent! Emergencies become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi- ● If the handbrake is only partially released, Additional notes on parking the vehicle on cle. This can be fatal. this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, gradients: which can impair the function of the brake Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle system and could lead to an accident. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake rolls against the kerb if it started to roll. Safety pads. ● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point towards the kerb.

151 Operation

Braking and stability systems Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* The control lamp  has the following func- The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak- tions: Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* ing the wheels individually. ● It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC is activated. The system uses the steering wheel angle This Electronic Stability System reduces the and road speed to calculate the changes of ● It will light up if there is a fault in the ESC. risk of skidding and improves the vehicle's direction desired by the driver, and constant- ● stability and ability to hold the road. As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ly compares them with the actual behaviour ABS, the ESC light will also come on if a fault The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for should occur in the ABS. the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the traction control system (ASR). The ESC works ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati- If the ESC control lamp  lights up and stays together with the ABS. Both control lamps cally. on after the engine is started, this may mean will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are that the control system has temporarily The forces acting on the braked wheel bring faulty. switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC can the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the be reactivated by switching the ignition off The ESC system is started automatically vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end and then on again. If the control lamp goes when the engine is started. slides out), the system will act on the front out, this means the system is fully functional. wheel on the outside of the turn. The ESC system is always active and cannot be switched off. With the Easy Connect sys- The  lamp provides information about the tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASR Control lamp disconnection status of the system: or else select Sport mode. There are two control lamps for the electronic ● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected on stability control. The lamp  provides infor- The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin pressing the switch  or if we select ESC mation concerning function and  disconnec- is desirable ››› page 153. Sport mode, only by means of Easy Connect. tion status. For example: Both control lamps light up together when WARNING ● When driving with snow chains. the ignition is switched on and should turn ● Do not forget that the electronic stability off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the ● When driving in deep snow or on loose sur- control ESC cannot defy the laws of physics. time taken for the function check. This should be kept in mind, particularly on faces. slippery and wet roads and when towing a This programme includes the ABS, EDL and ● When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back- trailer. wards and forwards. ASR. It also includes emergency braking assistance (BAS). ● Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situa- Press the button to switch the ASR back on tion. The greater safety provided by the ESC when you no longer need wheel spin. should not encourage you to run any risks. 152 Driving

CAUTION The ASR automatically switches on when the If the system is deactivated or if it has any engine is started. If necessary, it could be fault, the warning lamp will remain lit. The ● To ensure that the ESC works correctly, all connected or disconnected by means of the warning lamp will also light up if a fault four wheels must be fitted with the same Easy Connect system. should occur in the ABS because the ASR op- tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of erates in conjunction with the ABS. For fur- the tyres can cause the system to reduce en- When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights ther information, see ››› page 153. data Technical gine power when this is not desired. up . The ASR should normally be left on. ● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for Only in exceptional circumstances, when The  lamp provides information about the example, to the engine, brake system, run- wheel spin is required, can they be turned off ning gear or to the combination of wheels using the ESC button, for example: disconnection status of the system: and tyres) may affect the operation of the ● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR. ● With compact temporary spare wheel. via Easy Connect. Advice ● When using the snow chains. By means of Easy Connect, the ASR function ● When driving in deep snow or on soft ter- is reactivated and the warning lamp switched Traction control system (ASR)* rain. off. ● When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it The traction control system prevents the driv- “by rocking it.” en wheels from spinning when the vehicle is WARNING Operation accelerating. This system always includes The ASR should be switched on again as ● Remember that not even the ASR can defy ABS. soon as possible. the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer. Description and operation of the traction Control lamp control system during acceleration (ASR) ● Always adapt your driving style to suit the There are two control lamps for the traction condition of the roads and the traffic situa- On front-wheel drive vehicles, the ASR sys- control system:  and . Both control lamps tion. The greater safety provided by the ASR tem intervenes, reducing engine power and light up together when the ignition is switch- should not encourage you to run any risks. Emergencies preventing the driven wheels from slipping ed on and should turn off after approximately during acceleration. The system works in the 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the func- CAUTION entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. tion check. If a failure occurs in the ABS, the ASR will al- ● To ensure that the ASR works correctly, so stop working.  identical tyres should be fitted on all four The lamp has the following function: Safety wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate ● It flashes when the ASR is working if the ve- of the tyres can cause the system to reduce and climb a gradient in slippery conditions hicle is moving. engine power when this is not desired. » where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible. 153 Operation

● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for the traction control system (ASR) becomes ● Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func- example, to the engine, brake system, run- disabled ››› . tion in the Easy Connect system by means of the button  and the function buttons ning gear or to the combination of wheels The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles Setup and ESC System . and tyres) may affect the operation of the with a driver information system*, the driver ABS and ASR. will be shown the electronic stability WARNING control (ESC) option: sport. Warning! Limited stability. You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on- Connecting/disconnecting ESC and ly if the traffic conditions and your driving ASR Disable ESC “Sport” mode ability allow you to do so safely: risk of skidding! Through the Easy Connect system menu The ESC is switched on automatically when ● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising ››› page 99. The warning lamp  will switch the engine is started, and only works when function will be limited to allow for a sportier off. For vehicles with a driver information sys- the engine is running and includes the ABS, drive. The driving wheels could spin and the tem*, the driver will be shown the elec- EDS and ASR systems. vehicle could skid. tronic stability control (ESC) The ASR and ESC function should only be option: on. switched off in situations in which traction is Note insufficient, among others: Disable ASR If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sport mode is selected, cruise control* will be The Easy Connect system menu is used to ● When driving in deep snow or on surfaces switched off. that are not very firm. switch off the ASR ››› page 99. The traction control system will be disabled. ● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck. The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles Electronic differential lock (EDS)* Then switch the ASR and ESC function back with a driver information system* the driver on. will be informed that ASR is disabled. The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi- Depending on finishes and versions, it is cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con- possible either to disconnect only the ASR or Activate ASR trol (ESC)*. else activate ESC Sport mode. The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 99 is EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel- used to switch on the ASR. The traction con- erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi- ESC in “Sport” mode trol system will be enabled. tions where this may otherwise be difficult or Sport mode can be connected via the Easy The control lamp  switches off. For vehicles even impossible. Connect page 99 system menu. The ability ››› with a driver information system* the driver It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle is limited; will be informed that ASR is enabled. of the driven wheels.

154 Driving

At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h to taking any risks when driving, this can Automatic hazard warning lights activation (50 mph), it is able to balance out differences cause accidents. The brake lights flash automatically to indi- in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi- cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially CAUTION an emergency situation. If the emergency slippery road surface. It does this by braking braking continues until the vehicle comes to the wheel which has lost traction and distrib- Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en- a standstill, the hazard warning lights will data Technical gine, the brake system, running gear or any uting more driving force to the other driven then come on and the brake lights will re- wheel via the differential. components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the EDL main on permanently from that moment. The To prevent the disc brake of the braking ››› page 187. warning lights will automatically switch off wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au- when the vehicle begins to move again or tomatically if subjected to excessive loads. when the "warning" light button is pressed. Advice The vehicle will continue to function normally Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)* without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not WARNING informed that the EDL has been switched off. The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is ● The risk of accident is higher if you drive The EDL will switch on again automatically only included in vehicles with ESC. too fast, if you do not keep your distance from when the brake has cooled down. the vehicle in front, and when the road sur- In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, face is slippery or wet. The increased acci- but not with maximum force. This results in dent risk cannot be reduced by the brake as- Operation Control lamp unnecessarily long braking distances. sist system. A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the This is when the brake assist system comes ● The brake assist system cannot defy the ABS control lamp  ››› page 155. Take the into action. When pressing the brake pedal laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer- dangerous even with the brake assist system! possible. Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. pressure so that the ABS can be activated WARNING Do not let the extra safety features tempt you Emergencies more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing into taking any risks when driving. ● When accelerating on a slippery surface, braking distance. for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped- wheels may start to spin. This could impair al, since the brake assist system switches off Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

the vehicle's stability. automatically as soon as you release the Safety ● Always adapt your driving style to suit road brake. The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the wheels from locking during braking and the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you in- is an important part of the vehicle's active safety system. » 155 Operation

How the ABS works ● The control lamp does not go out again af- WARNING ter a few seconds. If one of the wheels turns too slowly in rela- ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- tion to the vehicle's speed, and is close to ● The control lamp lights up when the vehicle serve the warnings ››› page 198, Working in locking, the system will reduce the braking is moving. the engine compartment. pressure to this wheel. The driver is made ● If the brake system warning lamp  should aware of this control process by a pulsating The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way, without the ABS function. Take the vehi- light up together with the ABS warning lamp of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is  cle to a specialised workshop as soon as , stop the vehicle immediately and check a deliberate warning to the driver that one or the brake fluid level in the reservoir possible. more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ››› page 206, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid ABS control function has intervened. In this If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the level has dropped below the “MIN” mark you situation it is important to keep the brake tyre pressure control lamp will also light up. must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regu- technical assistance. late the brake application. Do not “pump”. Brake system fault ● If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a If you brake hard on a slippery road surface,  If the ABS warning lamp lights up together failure of the ABS system. This could cause the best possible control is retained as the  with the brake warning lamp , there is a the rear wheels to lock quickly when you wheels do not lock. fault in the ABS function and in the brake brake. This could cause the rear to break However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee system ››› . away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and shorter braking distances in all conditions. seek technical assistance. Braking distance could even be further if you WARNING brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip- ● The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the pery surface. laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are Electronic differential lock (XDS)* dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that Control lamp the ABS is working (to counteract locked When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- wheels under braking), you should reduce tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn The control lamp  lights up for a few sec- speed immediately to suit the road and traffic at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In onds when the ignition is switched on. It conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea- this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out- goes out again after the system has run tures tempt you into taking any risks when er wheel) receives less drive torque than the through an automatic test sequence. driving. inner wheel. This may mean that in certain ● The effectiveness of ABS is also determined situations the torque delivered to the inner There is a fault in the ABS if: by the tyres fitted ››› page 210. wheel is too high, causing the wheels to ● The control lamp  does not light up when ● If the running gear or brake system is modi- spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is the ignition is switched on. fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se- receiving a lower drive torque than it could verely limited. transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral 156 Driving grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer tance is increased considerably when the ● besides having a gear engaged or being in or “lengthening” of the trajectory. brake servo is not active. neutral for manual gear change and with the selector lever at position S, D or R for an au- The XDS system can detect and correct this ● If the brake servo is not working, for exam- tomatic gearbox. effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC. ple when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably This system is also active when reversing up- Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside harder than normal. data Technical wheel and counter the excess driving torque hill. of that wheel. This means that the driver's desired trajectory is much more precise. WARNING Hill driving assistant* The XDS system works in combination with ● If you do not start the vehicle immediately

after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the Advice the ESC and is always active, even when ASR This function is only included in vehicles with vehicle may start to roll back under certain traction control is disconnected or the ESC is ESC. conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use in Sport mode. The hill driving assistant helps the driver to the hand brake immediately. move off and upward on a hill when the vehi- ● If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped- cle is stationary. al or use the hand brake immediately. Brake servo The system maintains brake pressure for ap- ● When following a line of traffic uphill, if you

want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back Operation The brake servo increases the pressure you proximately two seconds after the driver accidentally when starting off, hold the brake apply to the brake pedal. It works takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent only when pedal down for a few seconds before starting the vehicle from lurching backward when it is the engine is running. off. started. During these 2 seconds, the driver If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due has enough time to release the clutch pedal to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being and accelerate without the vehicle moving Note towed, you will have to press the brake pedal and without having to use the handbrake, The Official Service or a specialist workshop considerably harder to make up for the lack Emergencies making start-up easier, more comfortable can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with of servo assistance. and safer. this system.

WARNING These are the basic operation conditions: The braking distance can also be affected by ● being on a ramp or hill/slope,

external factors. Safety ● doors closed, ● Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to follow this instruction ● vehicle completely stationary, could result in an accident. The braking dis- ● engine running and foot on the brake,

157 Operation

Manual gearbox ● When changing gear, you should always it might be necessary to drive momentarily depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary with a high rpm ››› page 167. Driving with manual gearbox wear and damage. ● Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehicle WARNING Read the additional information carefully on a hill. This causes premature wear and The gear change indicator is only an auxiliary ›››  page 37 damage to the clutch. function and in no case should be a substi- ● Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal; tute for careful driving. Certain versions of the model may include a although the pressure may seem insignifi- ● The responsibility of choosing the correct 6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is cant, it can cause the premature wear of the gear depending on the situation (e.g. over- shown on the gearbox lever. clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do taking, driving up or down a slope or towing a The reverse gear can only be engaged when not need to change gear. trailer) lies with the driver. the car is stationary. When the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait For the sake of the environment about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed Gear-change indicator Selecting the correct gear can help to save down thoroughly in order to protect the gear- 3 Valid for vehicles: with a manual gearbox fuel. box. The recommended gear for saving fuel is in- The reverse lights switch on when the reverse dicated on the dash screen of certain vehi- Note gear is selected and the ignition is on. cles during driving. The recommended gear display is switched off when the clutch pedal is pressed. WARNING Display Meaning ● When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engag-  The optimal gear is selected. ed and the clutch released. Automatic gearbox*  Changing to a higher gear is recommended. ● Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident.  Changing to a lower gear is recommended. Driving programmes

Read the additional information carefully Note Information regarding the “cleanliness” of ›››  page 38 ● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever the diesel particulate filter while driving. The pressure of your hand The exhaust system manager detects that the The automatic gearbox has got two gearbox could cause premature wear on the selector diesel particulate filter is nearly saturated programmes. forks in the gearbox. and contributes to self-cleaning by recom- mending the optimal gear. For this purpose, 158 Driving

Selecting the normal programme gear for the automatic gearbox will also be To move the selector lever to position R, – Put the selector lever into position D. shown on the display. press the lock button down and, at the same time, press the brake pedal down, with the ignition switched on. Selecting the sport programme Tiptronic gear indicator If the automatic gearbox is shifted manually, With the selector lever in position R and the

– Put the selector lever into position S. data Technical the selected gears are shown on the screen ignition switched on the following occurs: If you select the normal programme, D, you at all times1). will drive in the economy mode, i.e. the pro- ● Reverse lights light up. gramme is designed to reduce fuel consump- P - parking lock ● The air conditioner automatically changes tion. The gearbox changes up into a higher the air recirculation mode.

When the selector lever is in this position, Advice gear as soon as possible and down into a the driven wheels are locked mechanically. ● The wiper starts if the windscreen washer is lower gear as late as possible. on. Position P on the lever must only be selected If you select the sport programme, S, you will if the vehicle is stationary. ● The parking distance warning system* drive in a sporty mode, i.e. a programme in switches on. which shifts into high gears are postponed in To move selector lever from position P, the order to use the full power of the engine. locking button on the selector lever handle N - Neutral (idling) must be pressed and the brake pedal de- Operation pressed at the same time while the ignition is If this position is selected, the gearbox is in switched on. neutral. Power is not transmitted to the Selector lever positions wheels and the engine does not have a brak- To put the selector lever in position P, simply ing function. Read the additional information carefully press the lock button down and, if necessary, ›››  page 38 depress the brake pedal down. Never use the N position to drive down a long hill. There is no engine braking and the

Selector lever positions R - Reverse gear brakes are subjected to excessive stain. Emergencies The gear selected is displayed on the side of The reverse gear is engaged in this position. You could damage the automatic gearbox if the selector lever and on the display1) in the you drive down hills with the gearbox lever in combi-instrument. The currently selected Reverse gear must be engaged only when the position N and the engine switched off. » vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling. Safety

1) Vehicles with the basic level of equipment do not show the position of the gear selector lever on the screen. 159 Operation

D - Drive (forward) WARNING ● If the vehicle moves with no control, an accident and serious injury may occur. In this position the gearbox automatically ● As a driver, you should never leave your ve- changes to a lower or higher gear, according hicle if the engine is running and a gear range to the engine's requirements, the driving is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle WARNING style and speed. The braking effect of the en- while the engine is running, you must apply Never switch the engine off until the vehicle gine when driving downhill is very limited the parking brake and put the selector lever is stationary. You could lose control of your when the selector is in this position. The in- in position P. vehicle. This could cause an accident and se- strument panel display shows the selected ● If the engine is running and if D or R is en- rious injury. gear as well as the selector lever in position gaged, you will need to hold the car on the ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not D. foot brake. The car will creep forward as the work when the ignition is switched off. power transmission is not fully interrupted When travelling at speeds lower than 5 km/h even when the engine is idling. ● The brake servo does not work with the en- (3 mph) or when the vehicle is stationary, gine off. You need more force to stop the vehi- ● Never accelerate when moving the selector press the brake pedal to change the selector cle. lever or you may cause an accident. lever from position N to position D. ● Power steering does not work when the en- ● Never move the selector lever to R or P gine is not running. That is why it is much when driving. Risk of accident! S - Standard driving position (Sport pro- more difficult to turn the steering wheel. ● Before driving down a long, steep slope, it gramme) ● Never remove the key from the ignition if is advisable to reduce speed and change into the vehicle is in motion. The steering lock When the selector lever is in position S, it will a lower gear. automatically change up into a higher gear could suddenly engage, and you would not be ● later, and change down into a low gear, if If you stop the vehicle up hill, always hold able to steer the vehicle. the foot brake strongly depressed down to compared with position D. This way, it is pos- stop it from rolling back. sible to take full advantage of the engine re- CAUTION serve power, depending on the engine de- ● Never allow the brake to rub and do not use If you allow the vehicle to move when the en- mand, driving style and speed. The braking the brake pedal too often or for long periods. Constant braking will cause the brakes to gine is switched off or with the selector lever effect of the engine when driving downhill is overheat and will considerably reduce the in position “N”, take your foot off the acceler- very limited. On the instrument panel display brake effect. This increases the braking dis- ator and wait until the engine starts idling the selected gear is shown as well as the se- tance and could cause the brake system to before returning to position “D”. lector lever to position S. fail. To select gear range S, press the lock button ● Never allow the car to roll down a gradient on the selector lever. with the gear in neutral N, or in selector lever position D, even if the engine is not running.

160 Driving

Selector lever lock The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to “rock” the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck

in snow or mud. The selector lever lock en- data Technical gages automatically if the brake pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about 1 second.

Fig. 160 Steering wheel with paddle levers Advice Selecting gears manually with Tip- for automatic gearbox. Fig. 158 Automatic gearbox tronic mode* The Tiptronic system allows the driver to se- The selector lever lock in position P or N pre- lect gears manually. vents gears from being engaged inadvertent- ly, which would cause the vehicle to move. Changing gear with the selector lever Operation The selector lever lock is released as follows: – Press the selector lever from position D to the right into the tiptronic selector gate. – Switch the ignition on. – Lightly press the selector lever forward – Press and hold the brake pedal and press ››› Fig. 159 + to change up to a higher the selector lever lock on the left of the se- gear. lector lever at the same time ››› Fig. 158. – Lightly press the selector lever backward Emergencies The warning lamp  on the instrument panel Fig. 159 Changing gear with Tiptronic. ››› Fig. 159 - to change down to a lower lights up when the brake pedal should be ap- gear. plied. This is essential when the selector lever is taken from the P or N positions. Changing gear with the steering wheel pad- Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta- dle levers* Safety tionary at a speed of up to 5 km/h (3 mph). – Press the right paddle lever + towards the At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) the selec- steering wheel to change up ››› Fig. 160. tor lever lock is automatically deactivated in position N. – Press the left paddle lever - towards the steering wheel to change down ››› Fig. 160. » 161 Operation

Using the paddle levers on the steering Note wards on a slope or “creeping” forwards, wheel, you can access manual driving mode e.g. at traffic lights. The selector lever does regardless of the pre-selected driving mode. ● The gear paddle levers on the steering not need to be put into the positions P or N wheel can be operated with the selector lever for this. in any position and with the vehicle in mo- General information about driving in tiptron- tion. – Do not press the accelerator. ic mode When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / Parking DSG automatic gearbox goes into a higher Driving tips – Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve- gear a little before the engine reaches its hicle comes to a standstill ››› in Selector maximum permitted revolutions. The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical- lever positions on page 160. If a lower gear is selected, the automatic ly as the vehicle moves. – Apply the handbrake. gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox will only change down when the engine cannot go Starting – By pressing the lock button down, move over its maximum permitted revolutions. – Start the engine with the selector lever in the selector lever to P and release the lock button. If “tiptronic” is selected whilst the vehicle is position P or N. in motion and the automatic gearbox / DSG Driving up and down hills automatic gearbox is in third gear and selec- Driving tor lever position D, “tiptronic” mode will – Press and hold the brake pedal. – Press the selector lever from position “D” then also be in third gear. to the right into the tiptronic selector gate. – Holding down the lock button (button on the selector lever), select R or D. – Lightly press the selector lever back to Changing gears in the normal or sport pro- change down. gramme using the steering wheel paddle lev- – Release the lever and wait a little for the ers gearbox to engage the gear (a slight move- Holding the car on a hill ment can be felt). If the paddle levers ››› Fig. 160 are used in – The brake must be always pressed down to the normal or sport programme, the system – Release the brake and press the accelerator prevent the vehicle from “rolling back- switches temporarily to “tiptronic” mode. To ››› in Selector lever positions on wards” ››› in Selector lever positions on exit “Tiptronic” mode again, press the right page 160. page 160. Do not try to prevent the vehicle paddle lever + towards the steering wheel from “rolling backwards” by increasing the for approximately one second. You will also Stopping briefly engine speed while a range of gears is se- leave “tiptronic” mode if the paddle levers lected. are not moved for a certain time. – If stopping for a short time, keep the vehicle stationary by pressing the foot brake hard to prevent the vehicle moving back- 162 Driving

Starting the vehicle up hills CAUTION a fast acceleration, the vehicle could lose traction and skid. – Apply the handbrake. ● If you stop the vehicle up hills, do not at- ● You should use the kick-down feature only – With a selected gear, accelerate slowly and tempt to stop it from rolling back by depress- when traffic and weather conditions allow it at the same time, release the handbrake. ing the accelerator when a gear has been selected. Otherwise, the automatic gearbox to be used safely. The steeper the slope, the lower the needed may overheat causing damage. Pull the hand- data Technical gear. This increases the braking effect of the brake up or fully depress the brake pedal to engine. For example, when driving down a prevent the vehicle from rolling away. Gearbox malfunctions very steep slope in third gear. If the engine ● If you allow the vehicle to roll when the en- brake effect is not enough, the vehicle will gine is not running, or with the selector lever  Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve- speed up. The automatic gearbox automati- in position N, a lack of lubrication in the auto- hicle and place the lever in the Advice cally changes up to prevent the engine over- matic gearbox will damage it. position P. revving. Use the foot brake to reduce speed There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- and change into 3rd gear using Tiptronic* cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ››› in Selector lever positions on page 160. Kick-down feature ing. Seek specialist assistance. Your vehicle has an automatic interlock This feature allows maximum acceleration.  Gearbox: System fault! You

which prevents the selector lever from being Operation may continue driving. put into a position for driving forwards or in If you press the accelerator down thoroughly, reverse from positions P or N if the brake the gearbox automatically changes down, de- Have the fault corrected by a specialised pedal is not depressed. pending on speed and engine speed, into a workshop without delay. lower gear to take full advantage of give the The ignition key cannot be removed unless  Gearbox: System fault! You vehicle maximum acceleration. the selector lever is in position P. can continue driving with re- The gearbox does not change gear until the strictions. Reverse gear disa‐ Control lamp “Pressing brake pedal”  engine reaches the maximum determined en- bled Emergencies gine speed for the gear. When the warning lamp next to the selector Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop lever lights up, press the brake pedal. This is and have the fault repaired without delay. WARNING necessary when the automatic gearbox selec-  Gearbox: System fault! You tor lever is moved out of positions P or N. A You could lose control of the vehicle if you ac-

can continue driving in D until Safety text message or instructions to perform nec- celerate on slippery road surfaces. Risk of se- switching off the engine » essary operations may appear on the instru- rious injury. ment panel. ● Be particularly careful when using the kick- down features on slippery road surfaces. With

163 Operation

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900 an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- miles) first 500 km (300 miles). tance. – Speeds can be gradually increased to the ● New brake pads must be “run in” and do  Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your maximum road speed or maximum permis- not have the correct friction properties during driving accordingly sible engine speed (rpm). the first 200 km (125 miles). However, the reduced braking capacity may be compensated Continue driving at moderate speeds. When During its first few hours of running, the in- by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. the warning lamp switches off, you can con- ternal friction in the engine is greater than tinue driving in a normal manner. later on, when all the moving parts have bed-  Gearbox: press the brake and ded in. Environmental compatibility engage a gear again. For the sake of the environment Environmental protection is a top priority in If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a If the engine is run in gently, its life will be in- the design, choice of materials and manufac- high temperature, this driver message will be creased and its oil consumption reduced. ture of your new SEAT. displayed when the gearbox has cooled again. Constructive measures to encourage recy- Tyre and brake pad run-in cling ● Joints and connections designed for easy Run-in and economical driving New tyres should be run-in carefully for the dismantling. first 500 km (300 miles). New brake pads ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- should be run-in carefully for the first 200 km Running in a new engine tling. (125 miles). The engine needs to be run in over the first ● Increased use of single-grade materials. During the first 200 km (125 miles), you can 1,500 km (900 miles). ● compensate for the reduced braking effect by Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in applying more pressure to the brake pedal. In accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and Up to 1000 kilometres (600 miles) case of a sharp braking, the braking distance ISO 1629. – Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 will be longer with new brake pads than with the maximum speed. brake pads which have been run-in. Choice of materials ● Use of recycled materials. – Do not accelerate hard. WARNING ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part – Avoid high engine revolutions. ● At first, new tyres do not give maximum if its components are not easily separated. – Do not tow a trailer. grip, and require running-in. This may cause ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources. 164 Driving

● Reduction of volatile components, includ- pends in large part on your driving style. By Change gear early to save energy ing odour, in plastic materials. adopting an economical driving style and an- An effective way of saving fuel is to change ● Use of CFC-free coolants. ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can up quickly through the gears. Running the easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu- an unnecessary amount of fuel. dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive tion while saving money are listed below. data Technical 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second valent chromium. Active cylinder management (ACT®) gear as soon as possible. We recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a Depending on the equipment, the vehicle Manufacturing methods higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow may have active cylinder management the “recommended gear” indication that ap- ● (ACT®). Advice Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the pears on the instrument panel ››› page 158. protective wax for cavities. The active cylinder management (ACT®) may ● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- automatically deactivate some of the engine Avoid driving at high speed hicle transport. cylinders if the driving situation does not re- We advise you not to drive at the top speed ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. quire too much power. When it is switched permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption, off, no fuel is injected into these cylinders, ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- exhaust emissions and noise levels all in- hence total fuel consumption may be re- tems. crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving Operation duced. The number of active cylinders can be at moderate speeds will help to save fuel. ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- seen on the instrument panel display dues (RDF).  . ››› page 30 Avoid idling ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. It is worthwhile switching off the engine ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual Drive anticipating the traffic situation when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross- heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. etc.). Emergencies When you anticipate situations, you have to The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is ● The use of water-soluble paints. brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If greater than the amount of fuel needed to re- it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear start the engine. engaged, for example, if you see a red light ahead. The braking effect achieved in this The engine takes a long time to warm up Economical and environmentally- when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and Safety friendly driving tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are tant emissions are also especially high dur- reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner- ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore Fuel consumption, environmental pollution tia). best to drive off immediately after starting » and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de-

165 Operation

the engine. Avoid running the engine at high much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist- Note speed. ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear wear and impairs handling. ● If your vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not recommended that you switch this function off. Periodic maintenance The tyre pressures should always be checked ● It is recommended that you close the win- Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, when the tyres are cold. dows when driving at more than 60 km/h before beginning a journey, you will not con- Do not use winter tyres all year round as they (37 mph). sume more than the required amount of fuel. increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi- Avoid unnecessary weight plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can mum reliability and an enhanced resale val- burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious ue. Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- fault. crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable A badly serviced engine can consume up to ● Do not hold the car on a hill with the clutch, to always check the luggage compartment to 10% more fuel than necessary. use the foot brake or hand brake, using the make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- latter to start. The fuel consumption will be ing transported. Avoid short journeys lower and you will prevent the clutch plate A roof rack is often left in place for the sake from being damaged. To reduce the consumption and emission of of convenience, even when it is no longer ● On descents, use the engine brake, chang- polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) ing to the gear that is more suitable for the exhaust gas filtration systems should reach and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and the optimum operating temperature. about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra the brakes will not suffer. With the engine cold, fuel consumption is wind resistance caused by the roof rack even proportionally higher. The engine does not when it is not in use. warm up and fuel consumption does not nor- Engine management and ex- malise until having driven approximately four Save electricity kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom- The engine activates the alternator, which haust gas purification system mend avoiding short trips whenever possi- produces electricity. With the need for elec- ble. tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be- Introduction cause of this, always turn off electrical devi- Maintain the correct tyre pressures ces when you do not need them. Examples of WARNING Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad- devices that use a lot of electricity are: the ● Because of the high temperatures which equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres- blower at high speeds, the rear window heat- can occur in the exhaust purification system sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too ing or the seat heaters*. (catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil- low, fuel consumption can increase by as ter), do not park the vehicle where the 166 Driving

exhaust can come into contact with flamma- workshop. In general, the exhaust warning Diesel engine particulate filter* ble materials under the car (e.g. on grass or lamp will light up when any of the described at the forest edge). Fire hazard! symptoms occur ››› page 98. If this happens, ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system around the area of the exhaust system: Fire and escape into the environment. The cata- hazard! lytic converter can also be damaged by over- data Technical heating.

Note CAUTION While the control lamps , ,  or  re- Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-

main lit, there may be engine problems, fuel Advice cause the irregularity of the fuel supply may consumption may increase and the engine cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt may lose power. fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could Fig. 161 Vehicle data sticker on back cover of cause overheating and damage the catalytic the Maintenance Programme. converter. Catalytic converter Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel Partic- For the sake of the environment ulate Filter) if the vehicle data sticker (back

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic cover of the “Maintenance Programme”) lists Operation converter Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of the code PR 7GG ››› Fig. 161. – Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en- sulphur from the exhaust gas under some The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates gines, as lead damages the catalytic con- conditions. This depends on the sulphur con- most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys- verter. tent of the fuel used. Quite often the problem tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil- can be solved by changing to another brand – Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank. ter cleans itself. If this is not possible (for ex- of fuel. ample, multiple short trips) the filter will be – For engine oil changes, do not replenish Emergencies obstructed by soot and  the diesel engine with too much engine oil page 203, Top- ››› particulate filter warning lamp will light up. ping up engine oil. This does not represent a fault, it is a warning – Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump that indicates that the filter has not been leads if necessary ›››  page 52. able to regenerate automatically and that you must perform a cleaning cycle, as indicated Safety If you notice misfiring, uneven running or below. » loss of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the nearest specialised 167 Operation

Accumulation of soot in the diesel engine ard EN 590 is authorised and will not cause The control lamp  lights up:  particulate filter* damage to the engine or the fuel system. If a fault has developed during driving which If the control lamp  lights up you should ● Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur con- has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas help the filter clean itself by driving in the ap- tent may significantly reduce the useful life of (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and propriate manner. the diesel particulate filter. Your Technical drive carefully to the nearest specialised Service will be able to tell you which coun- workshop to have the engine checked. To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourth tries have diesel with a high sulphur content. or fifth gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range) at a minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph), with the engine running at approxi- Engine pre-heating/fault system*  mately 2,000 rpm. In this way, the soot build Engine management*  up in the filter is burned. When cleaning is The warning lamp lights up to show that the This warning lamp monitors the engine man- successful, the control lamp turns off. glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine. agement system for petrol engines. If the lamp  does not turn off, or the three  The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Con- The control lamp lights up lamps turn on (particulate filter , fault in trol) lights up when the ignition is switched  the emission control system  and glow If the control lamp lights up when the en- on while system operation is being verified. It plugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialised gine is started it means that the glow plugs should go out once the engine is started. workshop and have the fault repaired at the are preheating. The engine can be started straight away when the lamp switches off. earliest opportunity. If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are driving,  WARNING this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi- Control lamp flashes Always drive according to the road weather cle to a specialised workshop as soon as If a fault develops in the engine management conditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving rec- possible and have the engine checked. system while you are driving, the glow plug ommendations should never lead to illegal system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to manoeuvres in surrounding traffic. a specialised workshop as soon as possible Emission control system*  and have the engine checked. CAUTION Control lamp  flashes: ● Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any circumstances re- When there is misfiring that can damage the fuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive could damage the engine and the fuel sys- carefully to the nearest specialised workshop tem. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by to have the engine checked. the diesel producer in accordance with stand-

168 Driving

Driving tips ther information is available at any Technical ● Whenever driving through water, the Start- Service. Stop system* must be switched off Driving abroad In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the ro- ››› page 170. tation system must previously be disconnec- To drive abroad, the following must be taken ted. To do this, please go to a specialised Note into consideration: data Technical workshop. ● Check the depth of the water before enter- ● For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ing the flooded zone. ensure that unleaded petrol is available for ● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Au- Driving on flooded roads stop the engine in any situation.

tomobile organisations will have information ● Advice To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite about service station networks selling unlea- direction may splash water that could exceed ing through water, for example, along a flooded fuel. the maximum permitted water height for your ded road, please observe the following: ● In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle. car model is not sold, and therefore some ● The water should never come above the ● Avoid driving through salt water (corro- spare parts are not available or the technical lower edge of the bodywork. sion). services may only be able to carry out limited ● Drive at pedestrian speed. repairs. Operation WARNING SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the technical prep- After driving through water, mud, sludge, aration that your vehicle requires and also etc., the braking effect can be delayed slight- about necessary maintenance and repair ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and possibilities. brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully several times will remove the moisture and restore the full braking effect. Emergencies Adhesive strips for headlights In countries where vehicles drive on the other CAUTION side of the road to your home country, the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers ● Driving through flooded areas may severely of oncoming vehicles. damage vehicle components such as the en- Safety gine, transmission, running gear or electrical To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers system. to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur-

169 Operation Driver assistance systems Start-Stop function conditions ● The vehicle starts moving. ● The driver seat belt must be buckled. ● The brake pedal is pressed several times in Start-Stop System* ● The bonnet must be closed. a row. ● The engine must be at operating tempera- ● The battery has been discharged excessive- Description and operation ture. ly. ● The steering wheel must be straight. ● The Start-Stop System is manually deacti- The Start-Stop function stops the engine vated. ● The vehicle must be on flat ground. when the vehicle is stopped and starts it au- ● The windscreen de-mist function is turned tomatically when required. ● The vehicle must not be in reverse. on. ● A trailer must not be connected. ● The temperature of the interior exceeds the Vehicles with a manual gearbox ● The temperature of the interior must be comfort limits ( A/C button). – When the vehicle is stopped, put it into within the comfort limits ( A/C button should ● If the airflow is increased by more than 3 neutral and release the clutch pedal. The be selected). presses. engine will switch off. The warning lamp  ● The windscreen de-mist function must be will appear on the instrument panel dis- ● Temperature setting HI or LO is selected. off. play. ● The engine coolant temperature is insuffi- ● If in an increase in airflow is not requested. cient. – When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- ● The temperature must not be set to HI or gine will start up again. The warning lamp ● The alternator is faulty, for example the V- LO. will switch off. belt has ruptured. ● The driver door must be closed. ● If any of the conditions described in the Vehicles with an automatic gearbox ● The diesel particulate filter must not be in previous section are not fulfilled. – Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a regeneration mode, for diesel engines. When the engine is turned off by the Start- stop and keep the brake pedal pressed ● The battery charge must not be low for the Stop function, this is displayed on the instru- down with your foot. The engine will switch next start. ment panel. off. The warning lamp  will appear in the ● Battery temperature must be between -1°C display. (+30°F) and +55°C (+131°F). If the Start-Stop system is not switched on, the  warning lamp will appear on the instru- – When you take your foot off the brake pedal ment panel. the engine will start up again. The warning Start-Stop function interruption lamp will switch off. In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and the engine will automatically start:

170 Driver assistance systems

WARNING Activating and deactivating the Start- Switching the Start-Stop function on manually Never allow the vehicle to move with the en- Stop function gine off for any reason. You could lose control – Press the  ››› Fig. 162 button located on of your vehicle. This could cause an accident the centre console. The warning lamp will and serious injury. switch off. Technical data Technical ● The brake servo does not work with the engine off. You need more force to stop the vehicle. Fatigue detection (break rec- ● Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. That is why it is much ommendation)* more difficult to turn the steering wheel. Advice ● Turn off the Start-Stop system when driving Introduction through water (fording streams, etc.). Fig. 162 The Start-Stop function button.  ››› table on page 2 Note Every time the ignition is switched on, the The Fatigue detection informs the driver ● For vehicles with the Start-Stop function Start-Stop function is automatically activa- when their driving behaviour shows signs of and a manual gearbox, when the engine is ted. fatigue. Operation started, the clutch must be pressed. ● When the conditions for the Start-Stop Manually deactivating the Start-Stop func- WARNING function are not fulfilled, the instrument pan- tion Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue el displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed. – Press the  ››› Fig. 162 button located on detection system tempt you into taking any ● If the steering wheel is turned more than the centre console. When the Start-Stop risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi- 270°, it will not be possible to start the vehi- function is switched off, the warning lamp cient in length when making long journeys. Emergencies cle again. To start the vehicle, straighten the comes on. ● The driver always assumes the responsibil- steering wheel so that it is turned less than ity of driving to their full capacity. 270°. – If the Start-Stop function is operating then ● Never drive if you are tired. ● There are different versions of the dash the engine starts immediately. ● The system does not detect the tiredness of panel; the display of indications on the the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in- screen may differ. Safety formation in the section ››› page 172, System limitations. »

171 Operation

● In some situations, the system may incor- making a calculation of tiredness. This is System limitations rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu- constantly compared with the current driving The Fatigue detection has certain limitations vre as driver tiredness. behaviour. If the system detects that the driv- inherent to the system. The following condi- ● No warning is given in the event of the ef- er is tired, an audible warning is given with a tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- fect called microsleep! sound and an optic warning is shown with a vent it from functioning. symbol and complementary message on the ● Please observe the indications on the in- instrument panel display Fig. 163. The ● strument panel and act as is necessary. ››› At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) message on the instrument panel display is ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- Note pending on the case, is repeated. The system ● When cornering ● Fatigue detection has been developed for stores the last message displayed. ● On roads in poor condition driving on motorways and well paved roads The message on the instrument panel display ● In unfavourable weather conditions only. can be switched off by pressing the  ● When a sporty driving style is employed ● If there is a fault in the system, have it button on the windscreen wiper lever or the ● In the event of a serious distraction to the checked by a specialised workshop.  button on the multi function steering driver wheel ›››  page 25. The message can be recalled to the instru- Fatigue detection will be restored when the Function and operation ment panel display using the multifunction vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, display ›››  page 25. when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door. Conditions of operation Driving behaviour is only calculated on In the event of slow driving during a long pe- speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the around 200 km/h (125 mph). system automatically re-establishes the tiredness calculation. When driving at a faster Switching on and off speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- ted. Fatigue detection can be activated or deactivated in the Easy Connect system with the Fig. 163 On the instrument panel display: fa- button  and the function button  tigue detection symbol. ››› page 99. A mark indicates that the adjustment has been activated. Fatigue detection determines the driving behaviour of the driver when starting a journey, 172 Driver assistance systems

Parking aid ● Always keep visual control of the vehicle kerbs that could damage the bottom of the surroundings: use the mirrors for additional vehicle are not detected either. General information help. ● If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ignored, the vehicle could suffer considerable Various systems are available to help you CAUTION damage. when parking or manoeuvring in tight ● data Technical Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- The knocks or damage on the radiator spaces, depending on the equipment fitted fected by different factors that may lead to grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under- on your vehicle. damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- body can adjust the orientation of the sen- rounds: sors. This can affect the parking aid function. The rear parking aid is an audible assistant Have the function checked by a specialised that warns about obstacles located behind ● Under certain circumstances, the system workshop. Advice the vehicle ››› page 174. does not detect or display certain objects: – Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars, During parking, Parking System Plus assists Note the driver by visually and audibly warning fences, posts and thin trees. ● them about obstacles detected in front and – Objects that are located above the sen- In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in behind the vehicle page 174. sors, such as protrusions in a wall. ››› the detected area, e.g: – Objects with certain surfaces or struc- – WARNING tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- with rough or cobbled floors or ground Operation der snow. with long grass; ● Always pay attention, also when looking – with external ultrasound sources, such as straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur- ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments cleaning vehicles or other vehicles; roundings. The assistance systems are not a do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- replacement for driver awareness. When in- nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor- – In downpours, intense snow or dense ex- serting or removing the vehicle from a park- rectly, these objects or people wearing such haust gases; ing space, or when performing similar ma- clothes. – if the registration plate (front or rear) is

noeuvres the driver always assumes the re- ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected not properly affixed to the bumper sur- Emergencies sponsibility. by external sound sources. In certain circum- face; ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all stances this may prevent them from detect- – or in locations such as the brow of a hill. times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- ing people or objects. ● In order to guarantee good system opera- fic conditions. ● Please note that low obstacles detected by tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free

● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in the system may no longer be registered by of snow or ice, and do not cover them with Safety which obstacles and people are not regis- the sensors as the car moves closer, so the adhesives or other objects. tered. Pay special attention to children and system will not give any further warning. In ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- animals. certain circumstances, objects such as high ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply »

173 Operation

it directly only very briefly and always from a Make particularly sure that the sensors are Parking system plus* distance of more than 10 cm. not covered by adhesives, residues and the like, as this could affect the system's opera- ● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 191. operation of the Parking Aid. The approximate measurement range of the ● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys- rear sensors is: tem, it is advised that you practice parking in an area or car park that is free from traffic. side area 0.60 m There must be good weather and light conditions. central area 1.60 m ● The volume and tone of the warnings can As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- be modified, in addition to the indications val between the audible warnings will be re- ››› page 177. Fig. 164 Represented area. duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the ● In vehicles without a driver information warning will be constant: Do not continue to Parking system plus assists you audibly and system, these parameters can be modified in move forward (or backward) ››› in General a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised visually when parking. information on page 173, in General in- workshop. ››› formation on page 173 ! There are sensors integrated in the front and ● Please observe information on towing a rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle, trailer ››› page 177. If you maintain separation from the obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings and visu- ● The display on the Easy Connect screen the volume of the warning begins to reduce ally on the Easy Connect system. shows a slight time delay. after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning). In the event of danger of a frontal collision, the audible warnings come from the front of Activating/Deactivating the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of Rear parking aid* a rear-end collision they come from the rear. When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in is automatically switched on. This is con- Make particularly sure that the sensors are parking by means of audible warning firmed with a short warning. not covered by adhesives, residues and the like, as this could affect the system's opera- sounds. On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 191. system is disconnected immediately. Description The approximate measurement range of the There are sensors integrated in the rear sensors is: bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings. A 1.20 m 174 Driver assistance systems

B 0.60 m Manual disconnection of Parking Aid Change from reduced view to full view C 1.60 m ● Press the  button again. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector D 0.60 m lever to position R. Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display ● OR: press the car icon in reduced view. As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- (the audible sounds remain active) val between the audible warnings will be re- data Technical ● Press a button on the main menu of the fac- If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the tory-assembled infotainment system. (Rear View Camera “RVC”) warning will be constant: do not continue to move forward (or backward)! ● OR: press the BACK function button. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. If you maintain separation from the obstacle, Automatic connection of Parking Aid ● Advice the volume of the warning begins to reduce OR: Press the RVC function button. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector after four seconds (does not affect the tone A short confirmation signal will be heard and lever to position R. of the constant warning). the button symbol will light up yellow when ● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle the system is switched on. that is in its forwards path at a speed below Parking Aid operation 10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 175, Automatic activation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis- Automatic activation Operation tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic connection is activated in the infotainment system. A reduced display is shown.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid ● Move the selector lever to position P. ● OR: accelerate to more than approx. Emergencies 10 km/h (6 mph) forward.

Temporary suppression of sound in Parking Fig. 165 Centre console: parking aid button. Aid

Fig. 166 Miniature indication of automatic ac- Safety Manual connection of Parking Aid ● Press the  function button found on the steering wheel. tivation ● Press the  button once. When the Parking System Plus is switched on automatically, a miniature of the vehicle will » 175 Operation

be displayed and the segments will be If the system has been activated automatical- White segments: a white segment is dis- shown on the left side of the screen ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv- played when the obstacle is not within ››› Fig. 166. en when obstacles in front are at a distance the vehicle's trajectory or the direction of less than 50 cm. of travel is in the opposite direction to Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap- its location, and it is more than 30 cm proaching an obstacle located in front of the CAUTION from the vehicle. vehicle. It only operates every time the speed is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6 The automatic connection of the Parking Aid Yellow segments: obstacles located in the mph) for the first time. only works when you are driving slowly. If vehicle's trajectory and which are more driving style is not adapted to the circum- than 30 cm away from the vehicle are  If the parking aid is switched off using the stances, an accident and serious injury or displayed in yellow. button, the following actions must be carried damage may be caused. out in order for it to automatically switch on: Red segments: obstacles that are less than 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on played in red. again. Segments of the visual indication Moreover, with the SEAT Media System ● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be- Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi- fore reducing speed below this number cates the vehicle's expected journey based again. on the steering wheel angle. ● OR: place the selector lever in position P Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- and then move it from this position. cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding ● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa- audible warning will sound. tion in the Easy Connect system menu. As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the The automatic activation with parking aid segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. miniature indication can be switched on and When the penultimate segment is displayed, off from the Easy Connect system menu Fig. 167 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- this means that the vehicle has reached the ›››  page 24: nect system screen. collision zone. In the collision zone, the obstacles are represented in red, including ● Switch the ignition on. The distance of separation from the obstacle those out of the path. Do not continue to ● Select: CAR button > Settings > Parking can be estimated using the segments around move forward (or backward) ››› in General and manoeuvring. the vehicle. information on page 173, ››› in General in- ● Select the Automatic activation op- The optical indication of the segments works formation on page 173 ! tion. When the function button check box is as follows: activated , the function is on. 176 Driver assistance systems

Adjusting the display and audible Error messages sensors will not be activated when reverse warnings gear is engaged, when the selector lever is When the Parking Aid is activated or when it turned to position R or when the button  is The settings for the display and audible is switched on, if a message reporting a Park- pressed. warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- ing aid error is displayed on the instrument nect*. panel, there is a fault in the system. Parking System Plus data Technical If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- The distance to possible obstacles at the rear Automatic activation necting the ignition, next time that parking of the vehicle will not be displayed on the  on – activates the Automatic activa- aid is engaged in reverse, it will not be indi- screen and nor will it be indicated by means tion option ››› page 175. cated. of audible sound signals. Advice  off – deactivates the Automatic ac- The Easy Connect system screen will only dis- Parking System Plus* tivation option ››› page 175. play objects detected at the front, and the ve- If there is a fault in the parking aid system a hicle's trajectory will be hidden. Front volume* message will appear on the instrument panel indicating the error. In addition the  key Volume in the front and rear area. LED will blink. Rear Assist “Rear View Cam- Front sound settings/sharpness* If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is Operation displayed on the Easy Connect display in era”* Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is area. faulty, only the obstacles in the areas A and Operating and safety warnings B are displayed ››› Fig. 164. If a front sensor Rear volume* is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C WARNING Volume in the rear area. D and are displayed. ● The Rear Assist does not make it possible Emergencies Have the fault corrected by a specialised to precisely calculate the distance from ob- Rear sound settings/sharpness* workshop without delay. stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear overcome the system's own limits, hence us- area. ing it may cause serious accidents and injuries if used negligently or without due care. Towing bracket

The driver should be aware of his/her sur- Safety Adjust volume roundings at all times to ensure safe driving. In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket With the parking aid switched on, the active ● The camera lens expands and distorts the device from the factory, when the trailer is audio/video source volume will be reduced field of vision and displays the objects on the » to the intensity of the selected setting. connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear 177 Operation

screen in a different, vague manner. The hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying Instructions for use perception of distances is also distorted by a heavy load. this effect. ● In the following situations, the objects or ● Some objects may, due to the resolution of other vehicles shown in the navigation sys- the display screen - not be displayed in a sat- tem display appear to be further away or isfactory manner or may not be displayed at closer than they really are: Pay special atten- all. Take special care with thin posts, fences, tion: railings or trees that might not be displayed – On moving from a horizontal plane to a on screen and could damage the vehicle. slope. ● The rear assist has blind spots where it is – On moving from a slope to a horizontal not possible to represent people or objects plane. (small children, animals and certain objects cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon- – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. Fig. 168 On the rear bumper: location of the itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all rear assist camera times. – When the vehicle approaches objects ● that are not on the ground surface or are Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and  ››› table on page 2 snow, and do not cover it. jutting out from it. These objects may also be outside the camera's angle of vi- A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver ● The system is not a replacement for driver sion when reversing. awareness. Supervise the parking operation during reverse parking or manoeuvring at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround- ››› Fig. 168. The camera image is viewed to- ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style Note gether with orientation lines projected by the at all times to suit visibility, weather, road ● It is important to take great care and pay system on the Infotainment system screen. and traffic conditions. special attention if you are not yet familiar The bottom of the screen displays part of the ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by with the system. bumper corresponding to the number plate looking at the screen. ● Rear assist will not be available if the vehi- area that will be used as reference by the ● The images on the rear assist screen are cle's rear lid is open. driver. only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, protruding parts or holes in the road, Rear assist settings: for example, are more difficult to detect or Rear assist offers the user the possibility to may not be seen at all. change the image's brightness, contrast and ● Vehicle load modifies the representation of colour settings. the orientation lines displayed. The width represented by the lines diminishes with ve- To change these settings: hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehicle's surroundings when the inside of the ve- ● Park the vehicle in a safe place. 178 Driver assistance systems

● Apply the parking brake. ommends practising parking and manoeu- Parking and manoeuvring with the ● Switch the ignition on. vring with the rear assist in a place without rear assist too much traffic or in a car park when there ● If necessary, switch on the Infotainment are good weather and visibility conditions. system.

● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector Cleaning the camera lens data Technical lever to position R. Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow ● Press the  function button displayed on and ice: the right of the image. ● Make the desired adjustments on the menu ● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by based glass cleaning product and clean the Advice moving the corresponding scroll button. lens with a dry cloth. ● Remove snow using a small brush. Necessary conditions for parking and ma- ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice. Fig. 169 Display on the Infotainment system noeuvring with the rear assist screen: orientation lines. The system should not be used in the follow- CAUTION Switching the system on and off ing cases: ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to Operation ● clean the camera lens. The rear assist will switch on when the igni- ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or tion is on or the engine running, on engaging ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang- or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could lens. ing the selector lever to the R position (auto- damage the camera. ● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- matic gearbox). played very clearly or is incomplete. ● The system switches off 8 seconds after

● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) Emergencies or removing the selector lever from the R po- ● If the position and installation angle of the sition (automatic gearbox). The system will camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- also disconnect immediately after the igni- end collision. Have the system checked by a tion is switched off. specialised workshop. ● The camera will stop transmitting images Safety Familiarising yourself with the system above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with reverse engaged. » To familiarise yourself with the system, the orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-

179 Operation

In combination with the Parking System Plus 1 Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the Cruise speed* (cruise control - ››› page 173, the camera image will cease to approximate width of the vehicle plus the be transmitted immediately when reverse rear view mirrors) on the road surface. GRA) gear is disengaged or when the selector lever 2 End of the side lines: the area marked in is moved from the R position, and the optical green ends approximately 2 m behind Operation information provided by the Parking Aid sys- the vehicle on the road surface. tem will be displayed. 3 Intermediate line: indicates a distance of Also in combination with the system, the rear approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on assist image can also be concealed: the road surface. ● By pressing one of the Infotainment system 4 Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis- buttons on the display. tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle on the road surface. ● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that appears on the left of the screen (which Parking manoeuvre switches to the full-screen mode of the Park- ing System Plus's optical system). ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking space and engage reverse gear (manual Fig. 170 Turn signal and main beam head- If you wish to display the rear assist image gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi- light lever: switch and rocker switch for the again: tion (automatic gearbox). cruise control. ● Disengage reverse, or change the selector ● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel Read the additional information carefully lever's position, engage reverse again or so that the side orientation lines lead to- ›››  page 34 move the selector lever to position R. wards the parking space. The CCS is able to maintain the set speed in 1) ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so ● OR: Press the RVC function button the range from approx. 30 km/h (19 mph) to that the side orientation lines run parallel to 180 km/h (112 mph). Meaning of the orientation lines it. Once the speed setting has been saved, you ››› Fig. 169 may take your foot off the accelerator.

1) WARNING: the RVC (Rear View Camera) function button will only be activated and available when the reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to position R. 180 Driver assistance systems

When the cruise control is on and a speed is ice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or gravel), as vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for programmed, the indicator  on the instru- this could cause an accident. as long as you keep the switch pressed. ment panel* is lit. When you release the switch, the new speed ● Always switch the cruise control system off is stored. If the cruise control system is switched off, after using it in order to avoid involuntary the  symbol is switched off. The system will use. When you increase speed with the accelera- Technical data Technical also be switched off fully when the 1st gear ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is tor and then release the pedal, the system is engaged.* too high for the current road, traffic or weath- will automatically restore the set speed. This er conditions. Risk of accident. will not be the case, however, if the vehicle Switching on the cruise control system speed exceeds the stored speed by more ● 1 Note than 10 km/h (6 mph) for longer than 5 mi- Move the switch ››› Fig. 170 towards the Advice left to ON. The cruise control cannot maintain a constant nutes. The speed will have to be stored speed when descending downhill. It will in- again. Setting speed crease due to its own weight. Use the foot Cruise control is switched off if you reduce brake to slow the vehicle. ● Briefly press the lower part of the rocker speed by depressing the brake pedal. Reacti- switch SET– ››› Fig. 170 2 once when you vate the control by pressing once on the up- have reached the speed you wish to set. per part of the rocker switch RES+ ››› Fig. 170

Adjusting the stored speed* 2 . Operation When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held constant. The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or the brake. Temporary deactivation of cruise con- Switching off the cruise control system trol* ● Move the control 1 towards the right to Setting a higher speed OFF or turn the ignition off if the vehicle is ● Press the upper part of the rocker switch The cruise control system will be switched off stationary. RES+ ››› Fig. 170 2 to increase the speed. in the following situations: Emergencies The vehicle will continue to accelerate as ● WARNING long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. if the brake pedal is depressed, ● It could be dangerous to use the cruise con- When you release the switch, the new speed if the clutch pedal is depressed, trol system if it is not possible to drive at con- is stored. ● if the vehicle is accelerated to over stant speed. 180 km/h (112 mph), Safety Setting a lower speed ● Do not use the cruise control system when ● when the lever 1 is moved in the direction driving in dense traffic, on roads with lots of ● Press the lower part of the rocker switch of OFF without being fully engaged. » bends or on roads with poor conditions (with SET– ››› Fig. 170 2 to reduce the speed. The 181 Operation

To resume cruise control, release the brake or “SEAT Drive Profile” system Selecting the system setting clutch pedal or reduce the vehicle speed to ● If necessary, switch on the ignition. less than 180 km/h (112 mph) and press Function and operation   once on the upper part of the rocker switch ● To select SPORT mode, press the button until it lights up. RES+ ››› Fig. 170 2 . ››› Fig. 171 The CONVENIENCE mode is active when the   button is not lit. The set mode remains Complete system deactivation selected after the ignition is switched off.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox CUPRA vehicle version The system is completely turned off by mov- The modes of operation for the CUPRA are ing the control ››› Fig. 170 1 all the way to Normal and Sport rather than Comfort and the right hand side (set into the OFF posi- Sport. The vehicle always starts up in Nor- tion), or when the vehicle is stationary, mal. The last selection does not remain once switching off the ignition. Fig. 171 In the centre console: button to ad- the vehicle is turned off. just the "SEAT Drive Profile" system Vehicles with an automatic gearbox WARNING The “SEAT Drive Profile” system modifies the To completely disengage the system, the se- suspension system's characteristics and Adjusting the “SEAT Drive Profile” modifies lector lever must be placed in one of the fol- power steering behaviour. driving properties. The “SEAT Drive Profile” lowing positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehi- system should never encourage you to take cle stopped and the ignition turned off. you can choose between 2 different settings risks. with different characteristics. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- CONVEN- Balanced setting, suitable, e.g. for day-to- fic conditions. IENCE day use.

This gives the vehicle sporty characteristics WARNING SPORT and is suitable for a sporty driving style. If the warning lamps and the corresponding Settings can be changed when the vehicle is messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci- stationary or in movement. When a “SEAT dents and severe injuries. Drive Profile” setting is changed it is activated immediately. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messages.

182 Towing bracket device and trailer

● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity WARNING Towing bracket device and and in a safe place. If the warning lamps and the corresponding trailer messages are ignored when they light up, the CAUTION vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. Trailer mode

Failure to heed the control lamps and corre- data Technical sponding text messages when they light up ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- may result in damage to the vehicle. es. What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer? Note WARNING Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer If the “SEAT Drive Profile” system presents a Changing the “SEAT Drive Profile” settings when fitted with the correct equipment. Advice fault, the  symbol appears on the instrument while the vehicle is in motion can distract you panel, with the message Fault: Damping from the road and lead to accidents. If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted tow- setting. ing bracket it will already have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statuto- CAUTION ry requirements for towing a trailer. If you Failure to heed the control lamps when they wish to retrofit a towing bracket, consult Indication on the display and warning light up and the corresponding messages ››› page 185. Operation lamp may result in damage to the vehicle. Connectors There is a fault in the “SEAT Drive Pro-  Note Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector file” suspension. If the “SEAT Drive Profile” system does not for the electrical connection between the See a specialised workshop immediately and have the work as described in this chapter, have it trailer and the vehicle. “SEAT Drive Profile” suspension checked. checked immediately by a specialised work-

If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again after shop. If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to Emergencies the engine is restarted and the vehicle has travelled a use an adapter cable. It is available at any short distance, you do not need to take it to a special- Technical Service. ised workshop. Trailer weight/drawbar load Some warning and control lamps will light up

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If Safety briefly when the ignition is switched on to you do not load the trailer up to the maxi- check certain functions. They will switch off mum permitted trailer weight, you can then after a few seconds. climb correspondingly steeper slopes. »

183 Operation

The maximum trailer weights listed are only Tyre pressure Ball coupling of towing bracket* applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissi- sea level. With increasing altitude the engine ble pressure shown on the sticker on the in- The ball coupling is provided with instruc- power and therefore the vehicle climbing side of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pres- tions on fitting and removing the ball cou- ability are impaired because of the reduced sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the pling of the towing bracket. air density. The maximum trailer weight has trailer manufacturer's recommendations. to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the WARNING vehicle and trailer combination must be re- Exterior mirrors The towing bracket ball coupling must be duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or stored securely in the luggage compartment Check whether you can see enough of the part thereof). The gross combination weight to prevent them being flung through the vehi- is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus road behind the trailer with the standard rear cle and causing injury. the actual weight of the laden trailer. When vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you possible, operate the trailer with the maxi- should have additional exterior mirrors fitted. Note mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors ● By law, the ball coupling must be removed specified limit. to give sufficient vision to the rear. if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures the number plate. The figures for trailer weights and drawbar WARNING loads that are given on the data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes Never transport people in a trailer. This could only. The correct figures for your specific result in fatal accidents. Driving tips model, which may be lower than these fig- Driving with a trailer always requires extra ures for the towing bracket, are given in the Note care. vehicle documentation or in ››› chapter Tech- ● Towing a trailer places additional demands nical Data. on the vehicle. We recommend additional Weight distribution services between the normal inspection inter- Distributing the load vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow- The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy ing a trailer. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex- objects are as near to the axle as possible. ● Find out whether special regulations apply tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to towing a trailer in your country. distribution. to prevent them moving.

184 Towing bracket device and trailer

Speed Retrofitting a towing bracket* The attachment points A for the towing The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re- bracket are underneath the vehicle. duced with increasing speed. For this reason, The distance between the centre of the ball it is advisable not to drive at the maximum coupling and the ground should never be permissible speed in an unfavourable road, lower than the indicated value, even with a weather or wind conditions. This applies es- fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi- data Technical pecially when driving downhill. mum drawbar load.

You should always reduce speed immediately Elevation values for securing the towing bracket: if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snaking. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in- Fig. 172 IBIZA/IBIZA SC Advice creasing speed. B 65 mm (minimum) Always brake in due course. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) first and then, firmly. This will prevent the D 959 mm jerking that can be caused by locking of trailer wheels. Select a low gear in due course E 438 mm before going down a steep downhill. This en- F 209 mm Operation ables you to use the engine braking to slow down the vehicle. Fitting a towing bracket Reheating ● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a At very high temperatures and during pro- towing bracket, please contact a Technical longed slopes, driving with a low gear and Service to check whether your cooling system Emergencies high engine speed; always monitor whether needs modification. the excessive coolant temperature gauge is activated ››› page 204. Fig. 172 IBIZA/IBIZA SC: attachment points ● The legal requirements in your country for towing bracket. must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a separate control lamp).

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve- ● Certain vehicle components, for example Safety hicle is purchased, this must be completed the rear bumper, must be removed and rein- according to the instructions of the towing stalled. The towing bracket securing bolts bracket manufacturer. must be tightened using a torque wrench, »

185 Operation

and a power socket must be connected to the not recommended for some sportier versions. vehicle electrical system. This requires speci- Please consult your Technical Service. alised knowledge and tools. ● Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop. ● If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is a serious danger of accident. ● For your own safety, please observe the tow bracket manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION ● If the power socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.

Note ● SEAT recommends that the towing hooks be fitted at a specialised workshop. In certain versions this may entail fitting a heat insulat- ing plate, which is why it is recommended that you go to a SEAT Dealer. In the event that the plate is not installed correctly, SEAT is ex- empt from any liability. ● Due to the specific design of the exhaust, the fitting of a conventional towing hook is

186 Care and maintenance

Despite a continuous observation of the mar- Modifications Advice ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability, safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has Modifications must always be carried out ac- Care and maintenance not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot cording to our specifications. Unauthorised assume responsibility for any non-genuine modifications to the electronic components

parts used, even if these parts have been ap- or software in the vehicle may cause malfunc- data Technical Accessories and modifications proved by an official testing agency or are tions. Due to the way the electronic compo- to the vehicle covered by an official approval certificate. nents are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by the Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead Accessories, replacement of parts and impact on the driver's control of the vehicle,

to excessive wear of components, and also Advice modifications such as a cruise control system or electroni- invalidate your vehicle registration docu- cally-controlled suspension, must be ap- ments. Your vehicle is designed to offer a high proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and standard of active and passive safety. bear the e mark (the European Union's au- SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable Before purchasing accessories and parts, thorisation symbol). for any damage caused by modifications and/or work incorrectly performed. For this and before making technical changes to your If any additional electrical devices are fitted vehicle, we recommend that you consult your reason, we recommend having all work per-

which do not serve to control the vehicle it- Operation formed by a SEAT Technical Service using Technical Service. self, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops or SEAT® Original Spare Parts. SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide ventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity you with the latest information about the WARNING use, legal requirements and recommenda- declaration). tions from the manufacturer regarding acces- Any type of work or modification performed incorrectly on your vehicle can lead to mal- sories and spare parts. WARNING functions and can cause accidents. We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories, for example telephone holders Emergencies or cup holders, should never be fitted on the Accessories® and SEAT Approved Spare covers, or within the working range, of the Parts®. This way, SEAT can guarantee that airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of in- Roof aerial* the product in question is suitable, reliable jury if the airbag is triggered in an accident. and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the The vehicle can be fitted with a foldable* and necessary experience and facilities to ensure anti-theft* roof aerial which can be folded Safety that parts are correctly and professionally in- backwards, for example when going through stalled. an automatic car wash. »

187 Advice

To fold mation concerning the technical possibilities Note for retrofitting this equipment. Unscrew the aerial rod, tilting it backwards Please observe the operating instructions of into a horizontal position and then screw in Mobile telephones and two-way radios your mobile telephone/two-way radio. again. should be only fitted by a specialised workshop, for example a SEAT dealership. To return to working position Continue in the reverse order to the previous WARNING Care and cleaning instruction. ● Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while driving you could General notes CAUTION have an accident. Vehicle maintenance If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, be- ● Never attach the telephone mountings to fore entering the tunnel, put the aerial down the surfaces covering the airbag units or Regular care and washing help to maintain parallel to the roof and do not tighten to within the range of the airbags. There is a the value of the vehicle. This may also be one avoid damage. high danger of injury if the airbag is trig- of the requirements for acknowledging war- gered. ranty claims in the event of bodywork corro- ● Using your mobile telephones or two-way sion or paint defects. radios in the vehicle without an external aer- The best way to protect your vehicle against Mobile phones and two-way radios ial, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed authorised limits. This also may the harmful effects of the environment is SEAT has approved for your vehicle the use of occur to external aerials that have not been through correct maintenance and frequent mobile telephones and two-way radios pro- correctly installed. washing. The longer substances such as in- viding under the following conditions: sect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or ● The external aerial should be correctly in- CAUTION road salt and other aggressive materials re- stalled. Failure to consider the above-mentioned con- main on the vehicle, the more damage they ● The transmitting power should be a maxi- ditions could cause the electronics to mal- do to the paintwork. High temperatures, for mum 10 watts. function. The most common causes of faults instance in strong sunlight, further intensify are: the corrosive effect. The optimal reach of the equipment is only ● no external aerial, achieved with an external aerial. After winter, a period when salt is put on the ● external aerial incorrectly installed, roads, it is important to have the underside First consult your Technical Service if you ● transmitting power output in excess of 10 of the vehicle washed thoroughly. wish to use a mobile telephone or a two-way watts. radio with a transmitting power output in excess of 10 watts. Here you will receive infor- 188 Care and maintenance

Products for vehicle maintenance For the sake of the environment After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake discs and pads Car-care products are available in your Tech- ● When purchasing car care products, try to nical Services. Keep the product instructions could be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry” select ones that are not harmful to the envi- the brakes by braking several times. until you have used them up. ronment. ● The waste from car-care products should WARNING data Technical WARNING not be disposed of with ordinary household ● Car-care products can be toxic. Because of waste. Observe the disposal information on Water, ice and salt on the brake system can this, they must always be kept closed in their the package. reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- original container. Keep them out of the reach dent. of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning. CAUTION Advice Care of the vehicle exterior ● Always read and observe the instructions Before putting the vehicle through the car and warnings on the package before using wash, do not tighten the aerial if it is folded car-care products. Improper use could cause Automatic car wash tunnel because it can be damaged. health problems or damage the vehicle. The use of certain products may produce noxious The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vapours; they should be used in well ventila- vehicle can normally be washed without

ted areas. problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. Hand-washing Operation ● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail However, the paintwork wear depends to a varnish remover or other volatile fluids. large extent on the kind of the car wash tun- Vehicle washing These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of nel, the brushes used, its water filtering and – First soften the dirt and rinse it off with wa- fire and explosion. the type of cleaning and preservative prod- ter. ● Before washing your vehicle, or carrying ucts. – Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with out any maintenance, switch the engine off, Before going through a car wash, be sure to a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Use very apply the handbrake firmly and remove the Emergencies key from the ignition. take the usual precautions such as closing light pressure. the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to – Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean note apart from that. CAUTION water. If the vehicle has special accessories such as Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if – Special car shampoo should only be used

spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial, Safety for very stubborn dirt. the surface of the vehicle is dry. Never use a etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. tunnel operator first. – Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last, This could damage the paintwork or the windows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust using a different sponge or glove. » with plenty of water. 189 Advice

– Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. ● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: – Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from windows – Dry the vehicle surface gently with a cha- when washing the vehicle with a hose, do not ››› page 192. mois leather. direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors, rear lid, or sunroof. – Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotat- – In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals Risk of freezing. ing jets”) ››› . and their surfaces to prevent them from freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber – After washing, avoid sudden and sharp For the sake of the environment seals. braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever- To protect the environment, the vehicle al times ››› page 149. After washing the vehicle should be washed only in specially provided wash bays, to prevent toxic, oil-laden waste WARNING – After washing, avoid sudden and sharp water from entering the sewer system. In braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever- some places, washing vehicles outside wash ● Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet al times. bays is prohibited. (“rotating nozzle”). Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, damage WARNING can occur to the tyres. This may cause an ac- Note cident. ● Wash your vehicle with the ignition switch- Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. ● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can ed off. reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- ● Protect your hands and arms from cuts on dent. sharp metal edges when cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Washing the vehicle with a high pres- Risk of injury. sure cleaner CAUTION ● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can ● Do not use water hotter than +60°C reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- Be particularly careful when using a high (+140°F). This could damage the vehicle. pressure cleaner! dent. ● To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a suf- – Always observe the instructions for the ficient distance from sensitive materials such CAUTION high-pressure cleaner, particularly those as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing ma- concerning the pressure and the spraying terial, etc. This also applies to bumpers pain- ● Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehi- distance. ted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer cle surface is dry. Never use a dry cloth or the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the sponge for cleaning purposes. This could – Increase the spraying distance for soft ma- wear on the material. scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehi- terials and painted bumpers. cle.

190 Care and maintenance

Stickers attached by the factory ● Never use warm or hot water to remove The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if snow and ice from the reverse camera lens, the polish used does not contain wax com- Follow these directions to avoid damaging as it could crack the lens. pounds to seal the paint ››› page 191, Vehicle the stickers: ● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the paint maintenance. ● Do not use high pressure cleaners. lens. CAUTION data Technical ● To remove ice or snow from the stickers do To prevent damage to the paintwork: not use window scrapers or ice scrapers. Vehicle paint maintenance ● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain- ● Do not polish the stickers. ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic ● Do not use dirty cloths or sponges. Regular waxing protects the paintwork. parts. Advice ● Preferably wash using a soft sponge and You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water ● Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or soft neutral soap. does not form small drops and run off the dusty environment. paintwork when it is clean.

Good quality hard wax products are available Caring for plastic parts Sensors and camera lenses at your Technical Service. If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, ● Use a small brush to remove snow and a Regular wax applications help to protect the Operation de-icer spray to remove ice. paintwork from environmental contaminants clean them with approved solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products. ● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod- ››› page 188. It is also effective in protecting uct and a soft, dry cloth. against minor scratches. CAUTION ● Moisten the camera lens using a standard Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the ● alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro- The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle may damage the clean the lens with a dry cloth. tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year. plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spil- Emergencies led. CAUTION ● Cleaning products which contain solvents ● When you clean the vehicle with a pressure will damage the material. washer: Polishing the paintwork – Stay a suitable distance from the sensors Polishing is only necessary if the paint has Safety on the front and rear bumpers. lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be – Do not clean the camera lenses or sur- brought back by applying wax. Polishing rounding area with the pressure washer. products can be purchased in your Technical Service. 191 Advice

Cleaning of windows and mirrors the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper 2. Apply a specialist care product to the rub- blades from juddering, but wax deposits are ber seals. Cleaning windows not removed. The rubber strips on the doors, windows, etc. – Moisten the windows with commercially CAUTION will remain pliable and last longer if they are available, alcohol based glass cleaner. treated with a suitable rubber care product ● Never use warm or hot water to remove – Dry the windows with a clean chamois from time to time (for example silicone snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This leather or a lint-free cloth. spray). could cause the glass to crack! ● The heating element for the rear window is Caring for rubber seals will also prevent pre- Removing snow located on the inner side of the window. To mature ageing and leaks. The doors will be – Use a small brush to remove snow from the prevent damage, do not put stickers over the easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked windows and mirrors. heating elements on the inside of the win- after, they will not freeze so quickly in winter. dow. Removing ice – Use a de-icer spray. Door lock cylinder Cleaning windscreen wiper blades Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry The door lock cylinders can freeze up in win- the windows. The chamois leathers used on Clean wiper blades improve visibility. ter. painted surfaces are not suitable to clean 1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only windows because they are soiled with wax from the windscreen wiper blades. use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive deposits which could smear the windows. properties. 2. Use window cleaner to clean the wind- If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove screen wiper blades. Use a sponge or a ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one cloth to remove stubborn dirt. direction only without swinging it. Cleaning chrome parts Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to 1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth. clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos- Care of rubber seals its off. 2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth. Wax deposits can only be removed with a If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so quickly. If this does not provide satisfying results, use special cleaner available at your Technical a specialist chrome cleaning product. Service. Wax deposits on the windscreen 1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt Chrome cleaning products will remove stains could cause the wiper blades to judder. Add- from the rubber seals. from the surface. ing a window cleaner that dissolves wax to

192 Care and maintenance

CAUTION Alloy wheel rims The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend that you check the To prevent scratching chrome surfaces: Every two weeks protective coating under the body and on the ● Never use an abrasive cleaning product on – Wash salt and brake dust from alloy running gear, and retouch it if necessary, be- chrome. wheels. fore and after the winter season.

● Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a data Technical We recommend that you go to your Technical sandy or dusty environment. – Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims. Service to carry out repair work and additional anti-corrosion work. Every 3 months Steel wheel rims WARNING – Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels. Advice – Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion separate sponge. Alloy wheels require regular attention to pre- coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con- serve their appearance. If road salt and brake verter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys- Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium tem. The heat of the exhaust system or the dust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheel finish will be impaired. engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of rims should be repaired before starting to fire. Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy rust. wheel rims. Operation WARNING Car polish or other abrasive agents should Cleaning engine compartment ● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even not be used for maintaining the rims. If the Take special care when cleaning the engine at large spraying distances and short clean- protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying ing times, damage can occur to the tyres. stones, the damaged area should be re- compartment. This may cause an accident. paired immediately. Anti-corrosion treatment ● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can Emergencies reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- WARNING The engine compartment and the surface of dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden Observe the safety warnings ››› in Steel the power unit are given anti-corrosion treat- and sharp braking. “Dry” the brakes by brak- wheel rims on page 193. ment at the factory. ing several times ››› page 149, Braking capacity and braking distance. Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the vehicle is fre- Safety Vehicle underbody protection quently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle, the entire en- The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it gine compartment should be thoroughly from chemical and mechanical damage. cleaned before and after winter. » 193 Advice

Technical Services have the proper products even when the key is removed from the igni- CAUTION for cleaning and preservation as well as the tion! necessary workshop equipment. For this rea- Cleaning products which contain solvents will son, we recommend having this work per- damage the material. formed by them. For the sake of the environment Fuel, grease and oil deposits can be removed The anti-corrosion protection is usually re- when the engine is washed. The polluted wa- Cleaning wooden trim* moved if the engine compartment is cleaned ter must be cleaned in an oil separator. For with grease removing solutions, or if you this reason, engine washing should be car- – Clean the wooden trim with a water-mois- have the engine cleaned. On commissioning ried out only by a specialised workshop or a tened clean cloth. this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, petrol station. joints and components in the engine com- – If this does not provide satisfactory results, partment are given anti-corrosion treatment. use a gentle soap solution.

WARNING Caring for the vehicle interior CAUTION ● When working in the engine compartment, Cleaning products which contain solvents will always observe the safety warnings Cleaning plastic parts and the dash damage the material. ››› page 198. panel ● Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and al- – Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic Cleaning upholstery and fabric trim ways remove the key from the ignition. parts and the dash panel. ● Allow the engine to cool before you clean – If this does not provide satisfactory results, Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the the engine compartment. use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned with a ● Do not clean, for example, the vehicle un- product. special interior cleaner or with dry foam and derbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without a soft brush. protecting your hands and arms. You may cut WARNING yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure Never clean the dash panel and the airbag to comply could result in injury. module surface with cleaners containing sol- Cleaning the radio and climate con- ● Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system vents. Solvents cause the surface to become trols may affect braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden could become detached and cause injuries. To clean the radio and/or climate controls, and sharp braking. use a soft damp cloth. For more resistant dirt, ● Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera- a neutral soap solution may be used. ture-controlled and could start automatically, 194 Care and maintenance

Cleaning leather* cle is under solar radiation for long periods, WARNING the leather should be protected to prevent it Normal cleaning from fading. However, slight colour variations ● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the in high-quality natural leather are normal. seat belts, as this can impair the strength of – Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa- the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not ter and wipe over the leather surfaces. come into contact with corrosive fluids.

CAUTION data Technical ● Check the condition of the seat belts at reg- Cleaning stubborn stains ● Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe ular intervals. If you notice that the belt web- cream, spot removers or similar products on – More stubborn dirt can be removed using a bing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle leather. mild soap solution (pure liquid soap; two of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must tablespoons diluted in one litre of water) ● To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be replaced by a specialised workshop. Advice and a cloth. be removed by a specialised workshop. ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- – Do not let the water soak through the leath- moved or modified in any way. er or soak into the seams. Seat belt cleaning – Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth. CAUTION A dirty belt may not work properly. Check all After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com- Leather maintenance seat belts regularly and keep them clean. pletely before rolling them up. Otherwise, the Operation – The leather should be treated twice a year belt retractors could become damaged. Seat belts cleaning with a special leather-care product, available at Technical Services. – Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it. – Apply these products very sparingly. – Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap – Then wipe off with a soft cloth. solution. Emergencies SEAT does everything possible to preserve – Allow it to dry. the genuine qualities of this natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially – Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry. selected hides employed, the finished leath- If large stains form on the belts, the automat- er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, ic belt retractor will not work correctly. etc. so a degree of care is required in every- Safety day use and when looking after the leather. Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If the vehi- 195 Advice

Checking and refilling levels ● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have (up to one minute). This is due to the fact that to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the fuel system has to purge itself of air be- Refuelling the following: fore starting. – Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic For the sake of the environment Refuelling charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto- Read the additional information carefully cause an explosion. Always place the matic filler nozzle has switched off, this may ›››  page 41 canister on the ground to fill it. cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm. If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor- – Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible. rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond – If the spare fuel canister is made of met- Fuel this point, as this will fill the expansion al, the filling nozzle must be in contact chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient condi- with the canister during filling. This Types of petrol tions are warm. helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up. The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the fuel tank flap. en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are flap. explosive. Danger of death. The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter and must only be run on unleaded pet- WARNING rol. The petrol must comply with European CAUTION ● Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se- Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN ● Fuel spills should be removed from the rious burns and other injuries. 51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re- paintwork immediately. fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of – Never smoke or come into contact with ● Never run the tank completely dry. Irregular 10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti- sparks when filling the fuel tank of the fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a result, vehicle or a spare fuel canister with fuel. ated by their octane rating (RON). unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic convert- This is an explosion hazard. er and cause damage. The following titles appear on the corre- – Follow legal requirements for the use of sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap: ● When filling the fuel tank after having run it spare fuel canisters. completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en- – For safety reasons we do not recommend gine the ignition must be switched on for at carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi- least 30 seconds before starting the engine. cle. The canister could be damaged in an Subsequently, when you start the engine it accident and leak. may take longer than normal to start firing

196 Checking and refilling levels

Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc- petrol industry, free of metals. These addi- ● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or tane unleaded petrol tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel containing other metal additives would We recommend you use super 95 octane pet- fuel system clean and prevent deposits from seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane building up in the engine. converter. petrol, with a slight decrease in power. If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi- ● Only use fuel additives that have been ap- tives is not available or engine problems proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti- data Technical Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95 arise, the necessary additives must be added knock additives may contain metal additives octanes when refuelling ››› . that could seriously damage the engine or the catalytic converter. These additives must You should use super petrol with a minimum Not all petrol additives have been shown to not be used. of 95 octanes. be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad- ● High engine speed and full throttle can Advice If super is not available, in an emergency you ditives may cause significant damage to the damage the engine when using petrol with an may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad- octane rating lower than the correct grade for this case only use moderate engine speeds ditives should never be used. Metal additives the engine. and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon may also be contained in petrol additives for as possible. improving anti-detonation ratings or octane Note ratings ››› . ● You may use petrol with a high octane num- Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc- SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen ber than the one recommended for your en- Operation tane unleaded petrol Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”. gine. We recommend you use super plus 98 octane These additives can be bought at SEAT deal- ● In those countries where unleaded petrol is petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc- ers, where information on how to use them not available, you may refuel with a fuel with tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power. can also be obtained. a low lead content.

If super is not available, in an emergency you CAUTION may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In Emergencies ● this case only use moderate engine speeds Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the Diesel fuel fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of as possible. Please note the information on the inside of metal additives. Using them may damage the the fuel tank flap. engine!

Petrol additives Safety ● Never refuel with fuels containing a large We recommend the use of diesel fuel which The quality of the fuel influences the behav- proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85). complies to European standard EN 590. If iour, power and service life of the engine. This could damage the fuel system. diesel fuel which meets European standard This is why the petrol you use should carry EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number suitable additives already included by the (CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine » 197 Advice

is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul- Programme. We recommend having this done carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! phur content of the fuel must be below 50 by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed Have the work carried out by a specialised parts per million. to collect in the filter, this can cause engine workshop if you are uncertain. performance problems. All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool- Winter-grade diesel ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it are under constant development. SEAT pro- is more difficult to start the engine. For this Working in the engine compart- vides a constant flow of information to Tech- reason, petrol stations in some countries al- nical Services concerning modifications. For so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity ment this reason, we recommend you have service when cold (winter-grade diesel). fluids and consumables replaced by a Techni- safety notes for work in the engine cal Service. Please observe the relevant in- Water in the fuel filter1) compartment structions ››› page 187. The engine compart- If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area ››› . equipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa- Read the additional information carefully rator, the instrument panel may display the ›››  page 10 WARNING following warning:  Water in the Before starting any work on the engine or in All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, fuel filter. If this is the case, take the the engine compartment: involves the danger of injury and burns, acci- vehicle to a specialised workshop so that 1. Switch off the engine and remove the key dents and even fire. they can drain the fuel filter. from the ignition. ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine CAUTION 2. Apply the handbrake. compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of ● The vehicle is not designed for the use of 3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selec- sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would tor lever to position P. coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to be damaged if you used biodiesel. 4. Wait for the engine to cool down. cool before carefully opening the bonnet. ● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called ● Switch off the engine and remove the key “thinners”, petrol or similar additives with 5. Keep children away from the vehicle. from the ignition. diesel fuel. 6. Raise the bonnet ››› page 199. ● Apply the handbrake and move the gear ● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be lever to neutral or selector lever to position P. You should not do any work in the engine necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre- ● Keep children away from the vehicle. quently than is specified in the Maintenance compartment unless you know exactly how to

1) Valid for the market: Algeria. 198 Checking and refilling levels

● Never touch hot engine parts. There is a belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from ● After closing the bonnet, always check that risk of burns. the high-voltage ignition system. You should it is properly secured by the locking mecha- ● Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a also observe the following: nism in the lock carrier piece. The bonnet hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard. – Never touch the electrical wiring of the must be flush with the surrounding body panels. ● Avoid causing short-circuits in the electri- ignition system. Technical data Technical cal system, particularly at the points where – Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and ● While driving, if you notice that the bonnet the jump leads are attached ›››  page 52. long hair do not get trapped in rotating is not correctly closed then stop immediately The battery could explode. engine parts. Danger of death. Before and close it correctly. ● Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera- starting any work remove jewellery, tie ● Only open and close the bonnet when there ture controlled and could start automatically, back and cover hair, and wear tight-fit- is nobody within its range. even when the engine has been switched off ting clothes. Advice and the key removed from the ignition! – Never accelerate with a gear engaged CAUTION ● without taking the necessary precau- Never cover the engine with additional in- When topping up service fluids, make sure sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of tions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death. not to mistake them. Using the wrong fluids fire! could cause serious malfunctions and engine ● ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex- If work has to be carried out on the fuel damage! pansion tank when the engine is hot. If the system or on electrical components, you coolant is hot, the cooling system will be must observe the following safety notes in Operation pressurised! addition to the above warnings: For the sake of the environment ● Protect face, hands and arms by covering – Always disconnect the battery from the Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi- the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect on-board network. The vehicle must be ronment. For this reason you should make against escaping coolant and steam. unlocked when this is done, otherwise regular checks on the ground underneath the alarm will be triggered. your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other ● Always make sure you have not left any ob- fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a speci- jects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the – Do not smoke. alised workshop. Emergencies engine compartment. – Never work near naked flames. ● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, – Always have a fire extinguisher on hand. you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci- Opening the bonnet WARNING dent!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury. If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it could Read the additional information carefully Safety  page 10 ● If any work has to be performed when the suddenly open while driving leaving the driv- ››› engine is started or with the engine running, er without visibility. This could result in a se- The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- rious accident. there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety cle. » risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive 199 Advice

Before opening the bonnet ensure that the obscure your view of the road. Risk of acci- windscreen wipers are in rest position. dent. ● After closing the bonnet, always check that WARNING it is properly secured. The bonnet must be Hot coolant can scald! flush with the surrounding body panels. ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, ● If you notice that the bonnet latch is not se- smoke or coolant escaping from the engine cured when the vehicle is moving, stop the compartment. vehicle immediately and close the bonnet ● Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant properly. Risk of accident. is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully open the bonnet. ● When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings ››› page 198.

Closing the bonnet

– Slightly lift the bonnet. – Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. – At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall so it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above.

WARNING If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely

200 Checking and refilling levels

Checking levels Technical data Technical Advice

Fig. 173 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

1 Coolant expansion tank Note Operation 2 Engine oil level dipstick The layout of parts may vary depending on 3 Engine oil filler cap the engine. 4 Brake fluid reservoir 5 Vehicle battery 6 Windscreen washer reservoir Engine oil Emergencies The checking and refilling of service fluids General notes are carried out on the components men- Fig. 174 For vehicles with the battery in the tioned above. These operations are descri- The engine comes with a special, multi-grade luggage compartment. bed in ››› page 198. oil that can be used all year round. Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- From time to time, the levels of the different Overview Safety fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never tial for the correct operation of the engine You will find further explanations, instruc- and its long useful life, when topping up or fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious tions and restrictions on the technical speci- damage to the engine may be caused. changing oil, use only those oils that comply fications as of ››› page 216. with VW standards. » 201 Advice

The specifications (VW standards) set out in Because this oil is essential for extending the Vehicles with diesel particulate filter* the following page should appear on the con- service intervals, it must only be used ob- The Maintenance Programme states whether tainer of the service oil; when the container serving the following indications: your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate displays the specific standards for petrol and filter. diesel engines together, it means that the oil ● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in- can be used for both types of engines. tervals. Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the formation, may be used in diesel engines We recommend that the oil change indicated engine oil level is too low page 203 and equipped with particulate filter. Using other in the Maintenance Programme, be per- ››› LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- formed by a technical service or specialised top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter- tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- workshop. vals ›››  page 42 (up to a maximum of 0.5 fore: The correct oil specifications for your engine litres). ● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. are listed in the ›››  page 42. Fixed service intervals* ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the Service intervals engine oil level is too low ››› page 203 and If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife you cannot obtain the oil specified for your Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service interval” or it has been disabled (by vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis- request), you may use oils for fixed service (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, tance travelled). intervals, which also appear in VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or If the PR code that appears on the back of the ›››  page 42. In this case, your vehicle ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l). Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6, must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever this means that your vehicle has the LongLife Note service program. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2, comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro- gramme. Before a long trip, we recommend finding an QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is de- engine oil that conforms to the correspond- pendent on the time/distance travelled. ● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine ing VW specifications and recommend keep- oil level is too low ››› page 203 and you can- ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en- Flexible service intervals (LongLife service not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, gine oil will always be available for a top-up if intervals*) you can add a small quantity of oil conform- needed. Special oils and processes have been devel- ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 oped which, depending on the characteris- (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die- tics and individual driving profiles, enable sel engines) (up to 0.5 l). Warning lamp the extension of the oil change service (Long- Life service intervals). If this warning lamp  is red it indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low. 202 Checking and refilling levels

If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is Check engine oil level consumption is likely to be higher for the first accompanied by three audible warnings, 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level switch off the engine and check the oil level. must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- If necessary, add more oil ››› page 203. bly when filling the tank and before a journey. If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run data Technical WARNING the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance. Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out Checking oil level cautiously. ● When working in the engine compartment, Advice If the warning lamp is yellow  the engine always observe the safety warnings oil level should be checked as soon as possi- Fig. 175 Engine oil dipstick. ››› page 198. ble. Top up the oil at the next opportunity ››› page 203. Read the additional information carefully CAUTION ›››  page 41 Oil level sensor faulty* If the oil level is above the area A do not

If the  yellow warning lamp flashes, take Checking oil level start the engine. This could result in damage Operation to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. a Technical Service. the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to check the oil level every time – Briefly run the engine at idle speed until you refuel. the operating temperature is reached and then stop. Topping up engine oil – Wait for about two minutes.

Read the additional information carefully Emergencies – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with ›››  page 41 a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it Before opening the bonnet, read and observe in as far as it will go. the warnings ››› in safety notes for work in – Then pull it out again and check the oil lev- the engine compartment on page 198.

el. Top up with engine oil if necessary. Safety The position of the oil filler opening is shown Depending on how you drive and the condi- in the corresponding engine compartment il- tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- lustration ››› page 201. sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil Engine oil specification ›››  page 42. » 203 Advice

WARNING WARNING ● Never pour oil down drains or into the ground. Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil Only change the engine oil yourself if you comes into contact with hot engine compo- have the specialist knowledge required! ● Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large enough to hold all nents when topping up. ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- the engine oil. serve the warnings ››› page 198, safety notes CAUTION for work in the engine compartment. ● If the oil level is above the area A do not Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil start the engine. This could result in damage may cause burn injuries. Cooling system to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact ● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such a specialised workshop. as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. Control lamp ● When removing the oil drain plug with your For the sake of the environment fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre- There is a fault if: vent oil from running down your arm. The oil level must never be above area A . ● The  lamp does not go out again after a ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the few seconds. contact with engine oil. crankcase breather and escape into the at- ● The  lamp lights up or flashes while the ● mosphere via the exhaust system. Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be vehicle is running, and three acoustic warn- stored in a safe place out of the reach of chil- ing signals are emitted ››› . dren. Changing engine oil This means that either the coolant level is too CAUTION low or the coolant temperature is too high. Read the additional information carefully No additives should be used with engine oil. ›››  page 41 This could result in engine damage. Any dam- Coolant temperature too high The engine oil must be changed at the inter- age caused by the use of such additives If the  lamp lights up, stop the vehicle, would not be covered by the factory warranty. vals given in the service schedule. turn off the engine and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level. We recommend that you have the engine oil For the sake of the environment changed by a Technical Service. If the coolant level is correct, the overheating ● Because of disposal problems and the spe- may be caused by a malfunction of the radia- The oil change intervals are shown in the cial tools and specialist knowledge required, tor fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have Maintenance Programme. we recommend that you have the engine oil it replaced if necessary ››› page 80. and filter changed by a Technical Service. If the control lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop the vehicle

204 Checking and refilling levels and switch the engine off. Contact a Techni- Checking coolant level leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of cal Service or a specialised workshop. – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. coolant can only occur if the coolant boils and is forced out of the system as a result of Coolant level too low – Switch the ignition off. overheating. If the  lamp lights up, stop the vehicle, – Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-

WARNING data Technical turn off the engine and wait for it to cool pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the down. First check the coolant level. If the lev- coolant level should be between the marks. ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do el of the coolant is below the “MIN” mark, When the engine is hot, it may be slightly not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- top up with coolant liquid ››› . above the upper mark. sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of burns!

WARNING Topping up coolant ● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a Advice health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze ● If your vehicle is immobilised for technical – Wait for the engine to cool down. should be stored in the original container in a reasons, move it to a safe distance from traf- – Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with safe place out of reach of children. Failure to fic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights comply could result in poisoning. on and place the warning triangle. a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left ››› . ● If working inside the engine compartment, ● Never open the bonnet if you can see or remember that, even when the ignition is hear steam or coolant escaping from the en- – Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- switched off, the radiator fan may start up au- Operation gine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait un- ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in- til you can no longer see or hear escaping could damage the engine. If there is no jury. steam or coolant. coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- ● The engine compartment is a dangerous tinue driving. You should obtain professio- area. Before carrying out any work in the en- nal assistance ››› . WARNING gine compartment, switch off the engine and If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool- – If there is still some coolant in the expan- allow it to cool down. Always note the corre- ant system, the engine may fail leading to se- sion tank, top up to the upper mark. Emergencies sponding warnings ››› page 198. rious damage. – Top up with coolant until the level becomes ● Please make sure that the percentage of stable. additive is correct with respect to the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in Topping up coolant – Screw the cap back on correctly. which the vehicle is to be used. Read the additional information carefully Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a ● When the outside temperature is very low, Safety ›››  page 42 leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle the coolant could freeze and the vehicle would be immobilised. In this case, the heat- Top up coolant when the level is below the straight to a specialised workshop to have the cooling system examined. If there are no ing would not work either and inadequately MIN (minimum) mark. dressed passengers could die of cold. » 205 Advice

CAUTION Brake fluid Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings ››› in safety notes for Do not top up the expansion tank with cool- work in the engine compartment on ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter the Checking the brake fluid level page 198 in section “Safety notes for work- cooling system. In this case, stop driving. ing in the engine compartment”. Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there Read the additional information carefully is a risk of engine damage. ›››  page 43 In the course of time, brake fluid becomes hygroscopic and absorbs water from the am- The position of the brake fluid reservoir is CAUTION bient air. If the water content in the brake flu- shown in the corresponding engine compart- id is too high, the brake system could cor- The original additives should never be mixed ment illustration ››› page 201. The brake fluid rode. This also considerably reduces the boil- with coolants which are not approved by reservoir has a black and yellow cap. ing point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing brakes may then cause a vapour lock which severe damage to the engine and the engine The brake fluid level drops slightly when the cooling system. vehicle is being used as the brake pads are could impair the braking effect. automatically adjusted as they wear. ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur- Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates However, if the level goes down noticeably in Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the that the G13 additive has been mixed with an a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark, VW 501 14 standard. inadequate coolant. The coolant must be there may be a leak in the brake system. A changed as soon as possible if this is the You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid display on the instrument panel will warn you in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Serv- case! This could result in serious faults and if the brake fluid level is too low ››› page 98. engine damage. ice. If none is available, use only high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 WARNING standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT For the sake of the environment Before opening the bonnet to check the brake 4. Coolants and additives can contaminate the fluid level, read and observe the warnings environment. If any fluids are spilled, they ››› page 198. Using any other kind of brake fluid or one should be collected and correctly disposed that is not of a high quality may affect opera- of, with respect to the environment. tion of the brake system and reduce its effectiveness. Never use a brake fluid if the con- Changing the brake fluid tainer does not state that it complies with VW 501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or The Maintenance Programme indicates brake USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4. fluid change intervals. We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Service.

206 Checking and refilling levels

WARNING Windscreen washer reservoir CAUTION Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im- ● Never put radiator anti-freeze or other addi- pairs the braking effect. Topping up the windscreen washer tives into the windscreen washer fluid. ● Before opening the bonnet to check the reservoir water ● Always use approved windscreen cleansing brake fluid level, read and observe the warn- products diluted as per instructions. If you Technical data Technical ings ››› page 198. Read the additional information carefully use other washer fluids or soap solutions, ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed ›››  page 43 the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked. original container in a safe place out of reach The windscreen washer and the headlight of children. There is a toxic risk. washers are supplied with fluid from the

● Perform the brake fluid change according to windscreen washer fluid container in the en- Advice the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of gine compartment. The container holds ap- Vehicle battery the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the prox. 3 litres; in vehicles with headlight brake fluid is left in the brake system for too washers* it holds approx. 4.5 litres. long. This would seriously affect the effec- Symbols and warnings on handling tiveness of the brakes and the safety of the The tank is in the engine compartment. the battery vehicle. This may cause an accident. Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- Read the additional information carefully

screen and headlights. We recommend that Operation CAUTION you always add a product to the windscreen ›››  page 43 washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.  Wear eye protection Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork products exist on the market with high deter- immediately. gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be  Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protec- added all-year-round. Please follow the dilu- tive gloves and eye protection! tion instructions on the packaging. For the sake of the environment  Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited! Emergencies The brake pads and brake fluid must be col- WARNING lected and disposed of according the applica- Any work carried out in the engine compart-  A highly explosive mixture of gases is released ble regulations. The SEAT Technical Service when the battery is under charge. ment or on the engine must be carried out network has the necessary equipment and cautiously. qualified personnel for collecting and dispos-  Keep children away from acid and batteries! » ing of this waste material. ● When working in the engine compartment, Safety always observe the safety warnings ››› page 198.

207 Advice

WARNING on the battery must be disconnected. When a This could damage the electrical system or light bulb is changed, you need only switch electronic components. Always be aware of the danger of injury and off the light. chemical burns as well as the risk of accident ● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight or fire when working on the battery and the ● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlock- over a long period of time, as the intense ul- electrical system: ing the vehicle before you disconnect the bat- traviolet radiation can damage the battery tery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered. housing. ● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles con- ● When disconnecting the battery from the ● If the vehicle is left standing in cold condi- taining lead. vehicle on-board network, disconnect first tions for a long period, protect the battery the negative cable and then the positive ca- from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be dam- ● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear ble. aged. protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through ● Switch off all electrical devices before re- the vents. connecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. ● Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately Warning lamp Never reverse the polarity of the connections. for several minutes with clear water. Then This could cause an electrical fire. seek medical care immediately. Neutralise  It lights up any acid splashes on the skin or clothing ● Never charge a frozen battery, or one which with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plen- has thawed. This could result in explosions Alternator fault. ty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, and chemical burns. Always replace a battery consult a doctor immediately. which has frozen. A flat battery can also The control lamp  lights up when the igni- freeze at temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F). ● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are tion is switched on. It should go out when the prohibited. When handling cables and electri- ● Ensure that the vent hose is always connec- engine has started running. ted to the battery. cal equipment, avoid causing sparks and If the control lamp  lights up while driving, electrostatic charge. Never short the battery ● Never use a defective battery. This could the alternator is no longer charging the bat- terminals. High-energy sparks can cause in- cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery. You should immediately drive to the jury. tery immediately. nearest specialised workshop. ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- ● For vehicles with the battery in the luggage leased when the battery is under charge. The compartment: Check that the battery gas You should avoid using electrical equipment batteries should be charged in a well-ventila- ventilation hose is securely attached. that is not absolutely necessary because this ted room only. will drain the battery. ● Keep children away from acid and batteries. CAUTION ● Before working on the electrical system, ● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition you must switch off the engine, the ignition is switched on or if the engine is running. and all electrical devices. The negative cable

208 Checking and refilling levels

Checking the battery electrolyte level Charging or changing the battery WARNING

The electrolyte level should be checked regu- The battery is maintenance-free and is ● We recommend you use only maintenance- larly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- checked during the inspection service. All free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with standards T 825 06 and tries and in older batteries. work on the vehicle battery requires special- VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of

ist knowledge. data Technical – Open the bonnet and open the battery cov- 2001. er at the front ››› in safety notes for work If you often drive short distances or if the ve- ● Before starting any work on the batteries, in the engine compartment on page 198 hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat- you must read and observe the warnings ››› in Symbols and warnings on handling tery should be checked by a specialised ››› in Symbols and warnings on handling the battery on page 208. For vehicles with workshop between the scheduled services. the battery on page 208. the battery under the spare wheel, open Advice If the battery has discharged and you have the rear lid and lift the floor covering. The problems starting the vehicle, the battery For the sake of the environment battery is located next to the spare wheel. might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- Batteries contain toxic substances such as – Check the colour display in the "magic eye" ommend you have the vehicle battery sulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis- on the top of the battery. checked by a Technical Service where it will posed of appropriately and must not be dis- be re-charged or replaced. posed of with ordinary household waste. – If there are air bubbles in the window, tap

the window gently until they disperse. Operation Charging the battery The position of the battery is shown in the The vehicle battery should be charged by a corresponding engine compartment diagram specialised workshop only, as batteries us- ››› page 201. The location of the battery in ing special technology have been installed the luggage compartment can be seen in and they must be charged in a controlled en- ››› Fig. 174. vironment. The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top Emergencies of the battery changes colour, depending on Replacing a vehicle battery the charge state and electrolyte level of the The battery has been developed to suit the battery. conditions of its location and has special There are two different colours: safety features. Safety Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte- ● Black: correct charge status. nance, performance and safety specifications ● Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must of your vehicle. be replaced. Contact a specialised workshop. 209 Advice Wheels Concealed damage Tyre pressure monitoring system Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily Wheels and tyres visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. They General notes should be checked immediately by a Techni- cal Service. Avoiding damage – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar Tyres with directional tread pattern obstacle, drive very slowly and at a right An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- angle. rection of rotation on tyres with directional – Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel. This – Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove any guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid foreign objects embedded in the treads. aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

WARNING Storing tyres ● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- – When you remove the tyres, mark them in ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly care- Fig. 176 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. order to maintain the same direction of ro- fully to avoid possible accidents. tation when they are installed again. ● Never drive with damaged tyres. This may The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the – When removed, the wheels and/or tyres cause an accident. sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap ››› Fig. 176. should be stored in a cool, dry and prefera- ● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve- bly dark location. hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the 1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure – Store tyres in a vertical position, if they are vehicle immediately and check the tyres for from the sticker. The values refer to Sum- not fitted on wheel rims. damage. mer tyres. 2. The tyre pressures should only be checked New tyres when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised New tyres must be run in ››› page 164. pressures of warm tyres must not be re- The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- duced. cording to the type and make of tyre and the 3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you tread pattern. are carrying. 210 Wheels

Tyre pressure Tyre useful life pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of The correct tyre pressure is especially impor- them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark- tant at high speeds. The pressure should ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let- therefore be checked at least once a month ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po- and before starting a journey. sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini-

mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm data Technical Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can (measured in the tread grooves next to the be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be re- ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When placed. Different figures may apply in export driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con- countries ››› . sumption may increase slightly. Advice Tyre pressure WARNING Fig. 177 Tyre tread wear indicators. Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this low, causing an accident! reason, the tyre pressure should be checked ● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in- at least once per month ››› page 210. sufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it

becomes too hot, and this can cause tread Driving style Operation separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures. Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear. ● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident! Changing wheels around If the front tyres are worn considerably more Emergencies For the sake of the environment Fig. 178 Diagram for changing wheels than the rear ones it is advisable to change them around as shown ››› Fig. 178. The use- Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- ful life of all the tyres will then be about the sumption. The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style and fitting. same time.

Wear indicators Wheel balance Safety The original tyres on your vehicle have The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” However, various factors encountered in nor- ››› Fig. 177, running across the tread. De- mal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results in steering vibration. » 211 Advice

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as For the sake of the environment The tyres could also have the following infor- they otherwise cause excessive wear on mation: steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted. sumption. ● A direction of rotation symbol ● “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres. Incorrect wheel alignment New tyres and wheels The manufacturing date is also indicated on Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the New tyres and wheels have to be run in. side of the wheel). vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel alignment checked by The tyres and wheel rims are an essential “DOT ... 1103 ...” means, for example, that a Technical Service. part of the vehicle's design. Those approved the tyre was produced in the 11th week of by SEAT are specially matched to the charac- 2003. WARNING teristics of the vehicle and make a major con- We recommend that work on tyres and tribution to good road-holding and safe han- There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre wheels be carried out by a Technical Service. dling . bursts during driving! ››› They are familiar with the procedure and ● The tyres must be replaced at the latest Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and have the necessary special tools and spare when the tread wear indicators are worn not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- ››› page 211. Failure to follow this instruction rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des- posing of the old tyres. could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not ignations makes it easier to choose the cor- Any technical service has full information on grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa- the technical requirements when installing or is also a greater risk of “aquaplaning”. tions marked on the sidewall, for example: changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims. ● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in- 195/65 R15 91T sufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it WARNING to overheat. This can cause tread separation This contains the following information: and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always ● We recommend that you use only wheels observe the recommended tyre pressures. 195 Tyre width in mm and tyres which have been approved by SEAT ● If tyres show excessive wear, you should 65 Height/width ratio in % for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle handling. Risk of accident. have the running gear checked by a Technical R Tyre construction: Radial Service. ● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are 15 Rim diameter in inches ● Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna- fluid away from tyres. 91 Load rating code tive, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all times. ● Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- T Speed rating placed immediately!

212 Wheels

● Never use old tyres or those with an un- extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as CAUTION known “history of use”. soon as possible. The prescribed tightening torque for wheel ● If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must en- bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. sure that the flow of air to the brakes is not restricted. This could cause the brake system Wheel bolts to overheat. data Technical Tyre pressure ● All four wheels must be fitted with radial The design of wheel bolts is matched to the tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer- rims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the ence) and the same tread pattern. correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. Advice For the sake of the environment This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly. Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned. In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it Note is the same model ››› page 187. ● A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted

WARNING Operation to find out whether wheels or tyres of different sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, Fig. 179 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys- can be fitted, and to find out about the com- the wheel could become loose while driving. tem button. binations allowed between the front axle Risk of accident.  (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). ● The wheel bolts must be clean and turn The tyre monitoring lamp * compares wheel revolutions and with it, using the ESC, ● For technical reasons, it is not generally easily. Never apply grease or oil to them. the wheel diameter of each wheel. If the di- possible to use the wheels from other vehi- ● Use only wheel bolts which belong to the cles. This can also apply to wheels of the wheel. ameter of a wheel changes, the tyre control Emergencies lamp  lights up. The wheel diameter same model. The use of wheels or tyres ● If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts changes when: which have not been approved by SEAT for is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi- use with your model may invalidate the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- ● Tyre pressure is insufficient. cle's type approval for use on public roads. ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and ● The tyre structure is damaged. ● If the spare tyre is not the same as the threads can be damaged. Safety tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g. ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a winter tyres) you should only use the spare load. » tyre for a short period of time and drive with

213 Advice

● The wheels of one axle are under more sudden turning or braking manoeuvre. Stop Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels. pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or when possible, and check the tyre pressure Information on permitted winter tyre sizes on steep slopes). and status. can be found in the vehicle's registration ● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. ● The driver is responsible for maintaining documentation. Use only radial winter tyres. ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted. correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documenta- pressure must be regularly checked. tion also apply to winter tyres. ● The wheel on one axle is changed. ● Under certain circumstances (e.g. when Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi- Tyre pressure adjustment tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control lamp tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm. On adjusting tyre pressure or changing one may light up belatedly or may function incor- The speed rating code ››› page 212, New or more wheels, the ››› Fig. 179 button must rectly. tyres and wheels determines the following be kept pressed down, with the ignition on, speed limits for winter tyres: ››› until an acoustic signal is heard. Note Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph) Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy Con- If the battery is disconnected, the yellow nect system with the button  and the func- warning lamp  lights up after turning the S max. 180 km/h (112 mph) tion button Setup ›››  page 24. ignition on. This should turn off after a brief T max. 190 km/h (118 mph) journey. If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex- H max. 210 km/h (130 mph) ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load), In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the tyre pressure must be increased to the the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have recommended value for a full load (see the Winter service an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the view. These stickers are available from your tyre monitor system button is pressed down, Winter tyres technical service. The legal requirements of the new tyre pressures are confirmed. each country must be followed. In winter conditions winter tyres will consid- The tyre pressure control lamp  lights up erably improve the vehicle's handling. The Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres If the tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- handle better when the roads are free of than the value set by the driver, then the tyre pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice snow and ice. pressure control lamp ››› will light up. and snow. Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure of If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the WARNING 0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the pres- notes on the spare wheel ››› page 212, New ● When the tyre pressure control lamp lights sures specified for summer tyres (see sticker tyres and wheels. up, reduce speed immediately and avoid any on fuel tank flap). 214 Wheels

WARNING The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to damage and risk of accident. Technical data Technical For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly and reduce fuel consumption. Advice Operation Emergencies Safety

215 Technical data

Abbreviations used in the technical specifi- Technical data cations section Technical specifications kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly PS Important information used to denote engine power. rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Important Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

The information in the vehicle documentation Cetane number, indication of the diesel CZ always takes precedence over the informa- combustion power. Fig. 181 Chassis number. tion in this Instruction Manual. Research octane number, indication of RON Vehicles for certain export countries do not All technical specifications provided in this the knock resistance of petrol. have an identification plate. documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu- Chassis number ded in the Maintenance Programme or the Vehicle identification data vehicle registration documents shows which The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on the engine is installed in the vehicle. vehicle data sticker and under the windscreen, on the driver side ››› Fig. 181. Addi- The figures may be different depending tionally, the chassis number is located in the whether additional equipment is fitted, for engine compartment, on the right-hand side. different models, for special vehicles and for The number is engraved on the top side rail, other countries. and is partially covered.

Identification plate The type plate is located on the rear pillar of the front right door.

Vehicle data sticker The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel well, in the boot and on the rear Fig. 180 Vehicle data sticker (luggage compartment). cover of the Maintenance Programme.

216 Technical specifications

The following information is provided on the legislation in force at the time (for more infor- WARNING vehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 180 mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu- ● Please note that the centre of gravity may 1 Vehicle identification number (chassis ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- number) apply to the specified vehicle characteristics. cident. Always adjust your speed and driving

2 Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine data Technical The values relating to fuel consumption and style to suit road conditions and require- type, finish, engine power and gearbox CO emissions can be found in the documen- ments. type 2 tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating 3 Engine code, gearbox code, external cle at the time of purchase. or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per- paint code and internal equipment code missible axle load or the permissible total

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend Advice 4 Optional extras and PR numbers weight is exceeded, the driving characteris- on the equipment/features of each individual tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac- vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle. Chassis number conditions, traffic conditions, environmental The vehicle identification number can be conditions, load or number of passengers. read from outside the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen ››› Fig. 181. The viewer is Note Trailer mode located near the lower corner of the wind- In practice, and considering all the factors Operation screen. The chassis number is printed on the mentioned here, consumption values can dif- Trailer weights right water drain channel. The water drain fer from those calculated in the current Euro- channel is located between the suspension pean regulations. Trailer weight turret and the fender. To access the chassis The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- number, open the bonnet ››› page 198. proved are selected in intensive trials accord- Weights ing to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in Emergencies Information on fuel consump- Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 tion optional extras. The figure quoted includes km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver. in other countries. All data in the official vehi-

Fuel consumption cle documentation takes precedence over Safety Special versions, optional equipment fittings these data at all times ››› . » Approved consumption values are derived or retro-fitting accessories will increase the from measurements performed or supervised weight of the vehicle ››› . by certified EU laboratories, according to the 217 Technical data

Drawbar loads Wheels WARNING The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex- Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im- ceed 75 kg. bolts portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too In the interest of road safety, we recommend low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds. that you always tow approaching the maxi- Tyre pressures mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- The sticker with the tyre pressure values can ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. is too low, they could loosen while the vehi- load is too small. The tyre pressure values given there are for cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised If the maximum permissible drawbar load threads can be damaged. pressures of warm tyres . cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and ››› light-weight single axle trailers or tandem The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar higher Note axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa). metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about appropriate weight is legally required for the drawbar Snow chains load. wheel, tyre and snow chain size. Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only for the following tyres: WARNING ● For safety reasons, you should not drive at 175/70R14 Chains with links not exceeding 15 mm speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing 185/60R15 (including the chain closure) a trailer. This also applies in countries where higher speeds are permitted. 215/45R16 Chains with links not exceeding 9 mm (including the chain closure) ● Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle 215/40R17 Chains with links not exceeding 7 mm load or the permissible total weight is excee- (including the chain closure) ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries Wheel bolts and damage to the vehicle. After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. 218 Technical specifications

Engine data

Petrol engine 1.0 MPI 55 kW (75 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel Technical data Technical

55 (75)/6,200 95/3,000-4,300 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) a) Slight power loss.

IBIZA IBIZA SC Advice Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC Start-Stop Start-Stop

Top speed (km/h) 172 172 172 172

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,530 1,540 1,530 1,540 Operation

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,043 1,049 1,043 1,049

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 790 800 790 800

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790 790 790

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 Emergencies Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 520 520 520 520

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 800 800 800 800 Safety

219 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 66 kW (90 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

66 (90)/4,400-5,400 160/1,400-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC

Top speed (km/h) 184 184

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.0 7.0

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7 10.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,580 1,580

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,089 1,089

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 840 840

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 540 540

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000

220 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 66 kW (90 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

66 (90)/4,250-6,000 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC

Top speed (km/h) 185 185 Advice Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.0 7.0

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.6 10.6

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,570 1,570

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,079 1,079

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 830 830 Operation Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 530 530

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,000 1,000

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000 Emergencies Safety

221 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.0 EcoTSI 70 kW (95 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

70 (95)/5,000-5,500 160/1,500-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

IBIZA IBIZA SC Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC ecomotive ecomotive

Top speed (km/h) 187 191 187 191

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.4 10.4 10.4 10.4

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,590 1,590 1,590 1,590

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,095 1,095 1,095 1,095

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 850 850 850 850

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790 790 790

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 540 500 540 500

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1000 500 1000 500

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 900 500 900 500

222 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.0 EcoTSI 81 kW (110 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

81 (110)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

IBIZA IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA SC Outputs and weights Manual Automatic Manual Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 197 197 197 197 Advice

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.3 6.2 6.3 6.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.2 9.3 9.2 9.3

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,600 1,630 1,600 1,630

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,109 1,140 1,109 1,140 Operation Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 860 900 860 900

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 780 790 780

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 550 570 550 570

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 Safety

223 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

81 (110)/4,600-5,600 175/1,400-4,000 4/1197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC

Top speed (km/h) 197 197

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.1 9.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,590 1,590

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,102 1,102

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 860 860

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 780 780

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 550 550

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100

224 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

IBIZA IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA SC Outputs and weights Manual Automatic Manual Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 196 197 196 197 Advice

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.4 6.6 6.4 6.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 8.7 9.8 8.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,580 1,620 1,580 1,620

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,085 1,126 1,085 1,126 Operation Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 840 890 840 890

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 780 790 780

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 540 560 540 560

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100 Safety

225 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.4 EcoTSI ACT 110 kW (150 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC

Top speed (km/h) 220 220

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.3 5.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.6 7.6

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,630 1,630

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,143 1,143

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 890 890

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 570 570

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,200

226 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.8 TSI 141 kW (192 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

141 (192)/4,300-6,200 320/1,450-4,200 4/1,798 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights IBIZA SC

Top speed (km/h) 235 Advice Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.1

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 6.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,700

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,260

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 950 Operation Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 800

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) –

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) –

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) – Emergencies Safety

227 Technical data

Diesel engine 1.4 TDI 55 kW (75 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

55 (75)/3,000-3,750 210/1,500-2,000 3/1,422 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN

IBIZA IBIZA SC Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC Start-Stop Start-Stop

Top speed (km/h) 171 173 171 173

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.6 8.5 8.6 8.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.9 13.0 12.9 13.0

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,640 1,640 1,640 1,640

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,150 1,155 1,150 1,155

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900 910 900 910

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 770 790 770

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 570 570 570 570

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000

228 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 1.4 TDI 66 kW (90 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

66 (90)/2,750-3,500 230/1,500-2,500 3/1,422 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN Technical data Technical IBIZA IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA SC Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC Start-Stop Automatic Start-Stop Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 182 182 182 182 182 182

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 Advice

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,640 1,640 1,670 1,640 1,640 1,670

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,150 1,155 1,165 1,150 1,155 1,165

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900 910 940 900 910 940 Operation Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 780 780 790 780 780

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 570 570 580 570 570 580

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100 Emergencies Safety

229 Technical data

Diesel engine 1.4 TDI 77 kW (105 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

77 (105)/3,500-3,750 250/1,750-2,500 3/1,422 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN

IBIZA IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA SC Outputs and weights with Start-Stop without Start-Stop with Start-Stop without Start-Stop

Top speed (km/h) 192 192 192 192

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,650 1,650 1,650 1,650

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,161 1,156 1,161 1,156

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 920 920 920 920

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 780 780 780 780

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580 570 580 570

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100

230 Technical specifications

Dimensions Technical data Technical Advice

Fig. 182 Dimensions Operation Fig. 182 IBIZA IBIZA SC

A/B Front and rear projections (mm) 857/735 857/717

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,469 2,469

D Length (mm) 4,061 4,043

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,465/1,457 1,465/1,457 Emergencies

G Width (mm) 1,693 1,693

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,445 1,428

Turning radius (m) 10.7 10.7 Safety a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

231

Index

Air conditioning ...... 39, 141 Automatic car wash tunnel ...... 189 Index climatronic ...... 143 Automatic gearbox ...... 158 controls ...... 141 driving programmes ...... 158 A general notes ...... 137 driving tips ...... 162 ABS ...... 155 manual air conditioning ...... 40 kick-down device ...... 163 control lamp ...... 156 Air outlets ...... 138 manual release of selector lever ...... 38 Accessories ...... 187 Air recirculation selecting gears with Tiptronic ...... 161 Additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro- air conditioning ...... 142 selector lever lock ...... 161 gramme) ...... 31 heating and fresh air ...... 139 selector lever positions ...... 159 Adjusting Alarm system ...... 111 tiptronic ...... 158 front head restraints ...... 60, 128 switching off ...... 112 Automatic lighting ...... 118 lights ...... 121 Alloy wheel rims ...... 193 AUX-IN ...... 105 rear head restraints ...... 60 Alternator Adjusting the front seats warning lamp ...... 208 B adjusting the lumbar support ...... 127 Ambient lighting ...... 122 Back seat Adjusting the head restraints Anti-freeze ...... 42 folding down and raising the back seat back- front head restraints ...... 128 Anti-lock brake system ...... 152, 154, 155 rest ...... 129 rear head restraints ...... 60 control lamp ...... 156 Ball coupling ...... 184 Adjusting the seat ...... 127 Anti-puncture ...... 46, 76 Battery ...... 111 Adjustment Anti-puncture kit ...... 46, 76 Before setting off ...... 56 CAR menu ...... 99 check after 10 minutes ...... 78 Belt pretensioners ...... 65 seats ...... 57 Anti-puncture set ...... 76 Biodiesel ...... 197 AFS headlight bulbs ...... 87 Anti-theft alarm ...... 111 Bonnet ...... 10, 198, 201 Airbag covers ...... 14 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 111 closing ...... 200 Airbags ...... 66 switching off ...... 112 opening ...... 199 description ...... 67 Aquaplaning ...... 212 Boot hatch ...... 113 Airbag system ...... 14, 66 Aspects to note before setting off ...... 56 Boot lid ...... 113 activation ...... 68 ASR ...... 153 Brake assist ...... 152 control lamp ...... 68 control lamp ...... 153 Brake fluid ...... 43, 206 deactivation of front airbag ...... 70 Assistance systems changing ...... 206 description ...... 67 parking aid ...... 173, 174 Brake pads ...... 149, 164 front airbags ...... 14, 69 Assistance Systems Brakes functioning ...... 68 fatigue detection ...... 171 brake fluid ...... 206 head-protection airbags ...... 15 Assisted starting ...... 52 new Brake pads ...... 149 side airbags ...... 15 Audible warning signal Brake servo ...... 149, 157 seat belt not fastened ...... 62 Brake system ...... 206 warning and control lamps ...... 98

233 Index

Braking Changing a double headlight bulb Child seats ...... 16, 73 brake assist ...... 152 dipped beam headlights ...... 86 ISOFIX system ...... 18 Braking distance ...... 149 double headlight bulbs ...... 85 safety instructions ...... 16, 72 Braking system Changing an AFS headlight bulb ...... 87 securing with the seat belt ...... 17 warning lamp ...... 150 turn signal light ...... 87 Top Tether system ...... 18, 20 Bulbs xenon light ...... 87 Chrome parts changing the bulbs ...... 83 Changing a single headlight bulb cleaning ...... 192 Buzzer ...... 119 side light ...... 85 Cigarette lighter ...... 132 single headlight bulbs ...... 84 Cleaning ...... 188 C turn signal light ...... 84 alloy wheel rims ...... 193 Capacities ...... 40 Changing a wheel ...... 47 chrome parts ...... 192 fuel tank ...... 98 subsequent work ...... 50 engine compartment ...... 193 Car care Changing double headlight bulb fabric ...... 194 exterior ...... 189 side light ...... 85 high pressure cleaners ...... 190 Catalytic converter ...... 166, 167 Changing settings leather ...... 195 malfunction ...... 167 CAR menu ...... 24 plastic parts ...... 191, 194 CCS ...... 34 Changing the blades ...... 78 radio and climate controls ...... 194 Central locking Changing the bulbs rubber seals ...... 192 anti-theft alarm ...... 111 AFS headlight bulbs ...... 87 seat belts ...... 195 automatic speed-dependent locking ...... 108 fog light bulbs ...... 87 steel wheel rims ...... 193 central locking button ...... 108 general notes ...... 83 stickers ...... 191 electric windows ...... 116 interior light and reading light ...... 90 upholstery ...... 194 key by remote control ...... 110 number plate light ...... 90 washing the vehicle ...... 189 selective unlocking system ...... 107 turn signals ...... 89 windows and exterior mirrors ...... 192 self-locking system to prevent involuntary un- Changing the double headlight bulb windscreen wiper blades ...... 192 locking ...... 107 main beam ...... 86 wooden trim ...... 194 unlocking system ...... 108 Changing the single headlight bulbs Climatronic ...... 39 Central locking system ...... 106 dipped/main beam ...... 84 adjusting the temperature ...... 144 safe security system ...... 106 Charging the battery ...... 52 air recirculation ...... 144 Cetane number (diesel fuel) ...... 197 Checking levels automatic mode ...... 144 Changing a engine compartment ...... 201 blower selection ...... 144 DRL light bulb ...... 84 Child-proof locking controls ...... 143 Changing a bulb electric windows ...... 114 general notes ...... 137 additional brake light ...... 90 Child seat windscreen defrost ...... 145 luggage compartment light ...... 90 categorisation in groups ...... 73 Close ...... 106 tail light bulbs ...... 88 turn signal light ...... 86 234 Index

Closing ...... 106 Coolant temperature Disposal bonnet ...... 200 control lamp ...... 204 seat belt tensioners ...... 66 tilting panoramic roof ...... 116 safety instructions ...... 205 Door handle windows ...... 114 cooling system de-icing ...... 192 Coming Home ...... 119 checking coolant ...... 205 Door lock Coming Home Function ...... 119 Cooling system de-icing ...... 192 Contact key ...... 147 checking coolant ...... 204 Door lock cylinder Control and warning lamps coolant temperature gauge ...... 97 de-icing ...... 192 alternator ...... 208 topping up coolant ...... 204, 205 Door release lever ...... 93 anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...... 156 Correct position ...... 57 Doors ASR ...... 153 Correct sitting position childproof locks ...... 109 braking system ...... 150 front passenger ...... 58 opening and closing ...... 9 coolant ...... 204 rear seat passengers ...... 59 Double headlight bulbs ...... 85 diesel particulate filter ...... 166, 168 Cruise control ...... 34, 180 Driver EDL ...... 155 adjusting the stored speed ...... 181 see Correct sitting position ...... 57, 58, 59 emission control ...... 168 complete deactivation ...... 182 Driver information system engine oil ...... 202 control lamp ...... 180 additional electrical appliances ...... 31 ESC ...... 152 temporary deactivation ...... 181 assist systems ...... 29 instrument panel ...... 37 Current ...... 133 bonnet, rear lid and doors open ...... 28 lights ...... 117 engine oil temperature ...... 31 steering column lock ...... 145 D gear-change indicator ...... 28 windscreen washer fluid ...... 123 Dangers in not using the seat belt ...... 63 journey data ...... 29 Controls and displays Dash panel ...... 35 menu ...... 27 general instrument panel ...... 93 Data sticker ...... 216 operation ...... 25 Controls on the steering wheel Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 14 outside temperature ...... 27 operating the audio system ...... 102 Deactivation of front airbag ...... 70 saving tips ...... 31 operating the telephone and audio system . . 103 Diesel service intervals ...... 33 Convenience closing diesel particulate filter ...... 166 speed warning ...... 32 tilting panoramic sunroof ...... 116 refuelling ...... 197 timer ...... 31 windows ...... 116 Diesel engine particulate filter ...... 167 warning and information messages ...... 29 Convenience opening Diesel particulate filter Driving windows ...... 116 malfunction ...... 167 driving abroad ...... 169 Coolant Digital clock ...... 94 driving through water ...... 169 checking level ...... 205 Dimensions ...... 231 economical driving ...... 165 Coolant level Direction of rotation with a trailer ...... 184 control lamp ...... 204 tyres ...... 49 Display ...... 94, 95 235 Index

Driving abroad Emergencies ...... 75 Engine coolant ...... 42 headlights ...... 169 bulbs ...... 45 checking level ...... 204 petrol ...... 169 changing a wheel ...... 47 G12 plus-plus ...... 42 Driving assistance systems changing the battery ...... 209 G13 ...... 42 cruise control ...... 180 emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 51 specifications ...... 42 Driving data emergency warning triangle ...... 75 Engine data ...... 219 data summary ...... 30 fire extinguisher ...... 75 Engine fault memory ...... 29 first-aid kit ...... 75 control lamp ...... 168 Driving on flooded roads ...... 169 fuses ...... 44 Engine management ...... 166 Driving safety ...... 56 hazard warning lights ...... 121 control lamp ...... 168 Driving with a trailer ...... 183 Jump leads ...... 52 Engine oil ...... 41, 201 DSG ...... 158 panoramic/tilting sunroof ...... 11 changing ...... 201, 204 Duplicate keys ...... 110 puncture ...... 45 check oil level ...... 203 Dust and pollen filter ...... 137 replacing a blown fuse ...... 44 consumption ...... 203 Dynamic headlight range control ...... 121 spare wheel ...... 75 diesel ...... 201 vehicle tools ...... 75 engine oil dipstick ...... 203 E Emergency operation inspection service ...... 201 E10 selector lever ...... 38 maintenance intervals ...... 201 see Ethanol (fuel) ...... 196 Emergency warning triangle ...... 75 oil properties ...... 41 Easy Connect ...... 24, 99 Emission control system specifications ...... 201 EDL control lamp ...... 168 temperature display ...... 31 see Electronic differential lock ...... 154 Emissions data ...... 216 topping up ...... 203 EDS ...... 154 Engine Engine oil pressure Efficiency programme assisted starting ...... 52 control lamp ...... 202 additional electrical appliances ...... 31 running in ...... 164 Environment saving tips ...... 31 Start-Stop system ...... 170 ecological driving ...... 165 Electrical power socket ...... 133 Engine compartment ...... 10, 198, 201 environmental compatibility ...... 164 Electric windows ...... 11, 114 battery ...... 207 Environmental tips convenience opening/closing ...... 116 brake fluid ...... 206 refuelling ...... 196 Electrolyte ...... 209 closing ...... 200 Equipment ...... 187 Electronic differential lock ...... 152, 154 coolant ...... 204, 205 ESC ...... 152 control lamp ...... 155, 156 engine oil ...... 203 electronic stability control ...... 152, 154 Electronic differential lock (XDS) ...... 156 opening ...... 199 sport mode ...... 154 Electronic immobiliser ...... 147 safety notes ...... 198 see also Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . 152 Electronic stability control (ESC) ...... 154 windscreen washer liquid ...... 207 Ethanol (fuel) ...... 196 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 152 Exhaust gas emission control system ...... 167

236 Index

Exhaust gas purification system Front passenger front airbag Gear recommendation ...... 28 catalytic converter ...... 166 control lamp ...... 68 General instrument panel diesel particulate filter ...... 166 deactivation ...... 14 controls and displays ...... 93 Extending Front seat turn signal and main beam lever ...... 119 the luggage compartment ...... 129 manual adjustment ...... 12 warning and indication lamps ...... 35 exterior lighting Front seat backrest General overview of the engine compartment . . 201 changing the bulbs ...... 83 folding ...... 127 Glove compartment ...... 130 Exterior mirrors ...... 125 lifting ...... 127 Glow plug system ...... 149 adjusting ...... 13 Fuel ...... 41, 196 control ...... 126 consumption ...... 217 H folding in electrically ...... 126 diesel ...... 197 Handbrake ...... 149, 150 folding in manually ...... 125 ethanol ...... 196 warning lamp ...... 151 heated ...... 126 fuel gauge ...... 98 Hazard warning lights ...... 22, 121 Exterior view ...... 5, 6 refuelling ...... 196 HBA ...... 155 saving ...... 165 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 63 F Fuel consumption ...... 165 Head-protection airbags Fabric: cleaning ...... 194 why does fuel consumption increase? ...... 167 description ...... 15 Fastening rings ...... 134 Fuel tank cap safety instructions ...... 15 Fatigue detection ...... 171 opening and closing ...... 41 Headlight range control ...... 121 Fault in electronic differential lock (EDL) Fuel tank flap Headlights control lamp ...... 155 opening and closing ...... 41 driving abroad ...... 169 Faulty bulbs Fuses ...... 44, 80 fog lights ...... 119 changing the bulbs ...... 83 fuse box ...... 81 headlight washer ...... 125 Filling the fuel tank ...... 196 identifying blown fuses ...... 45 Head restraints ...... 12 Filling the tank ...... 196 identifying by colours ...... 44 adjustment ...... 128 fuel gauge ...... 98 preparation before replacing ...... 44 front head restraints ...... 60 Fire extinguisher ...... 75 replacing ...... 44 rear head restraints ...... 60 First-aid kit ...... 75 Headrests ...... 12 Floor mats ...... 61 G adjustment ...... 128 Fluid Level control ...... 40 Gear-change indicator ...... 28, 158 front ...... 60 Fog-light bulb Gearbox lever ...... 37 rear ...... 60 FR version ...... 88 Gear change ...... 37 Heated rear window Fog light bulb ...... 87 automatic ...... 38 heating element wires ...... 192 Front airbags ...... 14, 69 changing gears (manual gearbox) ...... 158 switch ...... 123 safety instructions ...... 69 manual ...... 37 Heating ...... 140 Front ashtray ...... 132 manual gear change ...... 158 defrosting the windscreen ...... 140 Front drink holder ...... 131 Gear engaged ...... 37 demisting the windscreen and side windows 140 237 Index

Heating and fresh air ...... 40, 139 Infotainment system ...... 24 Kick-down Heating and fresh air system Inspection ...... 201 automatic gearbox ...... 163 controls ...... 139 Inspection service ...... 201 Heating system ...... 140 Instrument cluster ...... 94 L Hill driving assistant ...... 157 Instrument panel ...... 94 Leaving Home ...... 119 Horn ...... 93 display ...... 94, 95 Leaving Home Function ...... 119 How to jump start ...... 52 instruments ...... 94 Lifting the vehicle ...... 48 description ...... 52 odometer ...... 97 Lighting of the instrument panel, ...... 121 Hydraulic Brake Assist service interval indication ...... 33 Lights ...... 21, 117 automatic hazard warning lights activation . . 155 warning and control lamps ...... 98 adaptive headlights ...... 120 Interior lights ...... 23 additional brake light ...... 90 I Interior mirror ...... 125 automatic lighting ...... 118 Identification plate ...... 216 anti-dazzle ...... 125 changing the bulbs ...... 83 Identifying letters on engine ...... 216 Interior view coming home ...... 119 Ignition ...... 21, 147 left guide ...... 7 control and warning lamps ...... 117 Ignition lock ...... 21, 147 right-hand drive ...... 8 daytime running lights ...... 118 Incorrect sitting position ...... 59 ISOFIX ...... 18, 20 fog lights ...... 118 Indications on the display ...... 95 ISOFIX system ...... 18 fog lights with cornering function ...... 121 assist systems submenu ...... 29 ISOFIX System ...... 20 headlight range control ...... 121 compass ...... 96 interior light and front reading lights ...... 90 distance travelled ...... 95 J interior lights ...... 122 doors, bonnet and rear lid open ...... 28 Jack ...... 47 leaving home ...... 119 driver information system ...... 25 mounting points ...... 48 lighting of the instrument panel ...... 121 ECO ...... 96 Journey data ...... 25 light switch ...... 117 journey data ...... 29 Jump leads ...... 52 luggage compartment light ...... 90 MKB ...... 96 main beam lever ...... 119 outside temperature ...... 27 K main beams ...... 22 recommended gear ...... 96 Key-operated switch ...... 70 number plate light ...... 90 SEAT Drive Profile ...... 183 Key by remote control parking lights ...... 119 second speed display ...... 96 unlocking and locking ...... 110 reading lights ...... 122 selector lever position ...... 96 Keys turn signal lever ...... 119 selector lever positions ...... 159 replacing the battery ...... 111 turn signals ...... 89 service intervals ...... 33 spare key ...... 110 Light switch ...... 21 speed warning ...... 96 synchronise ...... 111 Load compartment in the luggage compartment Start-Stop ...... 96 unlocking and locking ...... 110 see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 133 time ...... 96 vehicle key ...... 110 Loading the luggage compartment ...... 133 warning and information messages ...... 29 238 Index

Loading the vehicle Odometer ...... 97 towing bracket ...... 177 fastening rings ...... 134 reset button ...... 97 visual indication ...... 176 luggage compartment ...... 9 total ...... 94 Parking aid system roof luggage rack ...... 135 trip recorder ...... 94 see Parking aid ...... 173, 174 Locking and unlocking Oil change ...... 204 Parking distance warning system with the central lock button ...... 108 Oil properties ...... 41 see Parking aid ...... 173, 174 Luggage ...... 133 One-touch opening and closing Parking (automatic gearbox) ...... 162 Luggage compartment ...... 9, 133 electric windows ...... 115 ParkPilot luggage compartment lighting ...... 122 Open and close ...... 106 see Parking aid ...... 173, 174 store the rear shelf ...... 135 rear lid ...... 113 Particulate filter (diesel) ...... 166 unlocking manually ...... 10 Opening ...... 106 Parts ...... 187 see also Loading the luggage compartment . 133 bonnet ...... 10 Passenger Luggage compartment lid ...... 10 fuel tank flap ...... 196 see Correct sitting position ...... 57, 58, 59 tilting panoramic roof ...... 116 Pedals ...... 61 M windows ...... 114 Petrol Main beam lever ...... 119 Opening and closing additives ...... 196 Maintenance and cleaning ...... 187 bonnet ...... 10 refuelling ...... 196 maintenance intervals ...... 201 by remote control ...... 110 Plastic parts: cleaning ...... 191, 194 Malfunction fuel tank flap ...... 196 Pollution filter ...... 137 catalytic converter ...... 167 in the lock cylinder ...... 9 Positioning seat belts diesel particulate filter ...... 167 rear lid ...... 113 during pregnancy ...... 65 gearbox ...... 163 rear lid of the luggage compartment ...... 9 seat belts ...... 65 Manual gearbox ...... 158 tilting panoramic roof ...... 116 Power-assisted steering ...... 146 Mobile ...... 188 windows ...... 114 Power steering ...... 145 Mobile phones ...... 188 with the central lock button ...... 108 Pre-heating system Modifications ...... 187 Outside temperature ...... 27 control lamp ...... 168 Multimedia ...... 105 Products for vehicle maintenance ...... 188 P Puncture N Parking ...... 151 action ...... 45 Noises Parking aid ...... 173 tyres ...... 49 Parking Aid R Number of seats ...... 61 adjusting the display and audible warnings . 177 Radio frequency remote control...... 110 automatic activation ...... 175 Raising the vehicle ...... 48 O fault ...... 177 Rear Assist ...... 177 parking system plus ...... 174 instructions for use ...... 178 Octane rating (petrol) ...... 196 rear parking aid ...... 174 parking ...... 179 sensors and camera: cleaning ...... 191 239 Index

screen ...... 178 Roof carrier system ...... 135 Seat belt position special characteristics ...... 179 Roof luggage rack ...... 135 for pregnant women ...... 12 Rear Assist system ...... 177 attach the cross bars ...... 136 seat belts ...... 12 Rear drink holder ...... 132 Roof rack ...... 135 Seat belts ...... 61 Rear fog light Rubber seals adjustment ...... 12, 64 control lamp ...... 117 care ...... 192 control lamp ...... 62 Rear lid ...... 9, 10 Run-in ...... 210 protective function ...... 62 Rear seat passengers brake pads ...... 164 purpose ...... 61, 66 see Correct sitting position ...... 57, 58, 59 tyres ...... 164 safety notes ...... 63 Rear shelf Running in unfastened ...... 63 store ...... 135 engine ...... 164 Seat belt tensioners ...... 13 Rear View Camera ...... 177 control lamp ...... 68 Rear view mirror ...... 125 S SEAT Drive Profile ...... 182 Rear view mirrors ...... 125 safe indications on the display ...... 183 Rear window automatic wiper-washer ...... 124 driving safe ...... 56 SEAT Drive Profile System ...... 182 Rear window wiper ...... 124 Safe ...... 106 Seat heating ...... 128 Rear Window wiper ...... 123 Safe Security system ...... 106 Selective opening ...... 107 Rear window wiper blade Safety ...... 56 Selector lever (automatic gearbox) changing ...... 54 child safety ...... 72 manual release ...... 38 cleaning ...... 54 child seats ...... 72 positions ...... 159 Refuelling ...... 196 deactivating the front passenger airbag ...... 14 Service intervals ...... 33 opening fuel tank flap ...... 196 Safe driving ...... 56 Service notification: read ...... 34 Repair work ...... 187 Safety equipment ...... 56 Side airbags Replacement Safety instructions description ...... 15 parts ...... 187 coolant temperature ...... 205 safety instructions ...... 69 Replacement keys ...... 110 front airbags ...... 69 Side and interior bulbs ...... 89 Replacement parts ...... 187 head-protection airbags ...... 15 Signal lever ...... 22 Replacing the battery side airbags ...... 69 Single headlight bulbs ...... 84 of the vehicle key ...... 111 using child seats ...... 16, 72 Sitting position Reset the trip recorder ...... 97 Safety notes driver ...... 57 Rev counter ...... 94, 95 seat belt tensioners ...... 66 Snow chains ...... 50, 218 Rims using seat belts ...... 63 Spanner symbol ...... 33 changing a wheel ...... 47 Saving tips (efficiency programme) ...... 31 Spare wheel ...... 75 Roll-back function Seat Speed limiter ...... 180 tilting panoramic sunroof ...... 117 heating ...... 128 Speed warning ...... 32 windows ...... 115 Speed warning device ...... 32 Roof aerial ...... 187 Sport Mode ...... 154

240 Index

Start-Stop Switching the ignition on and off ...... 21, 147 Towing bracket device ...... 183 activating and deactivating ...... 171 System Easy Connect ...... 99 Towing the vehicle ...... 51, 79 function ...... 170 Towline anchorage Start-Stop System ...... 170 T front ...... 80 Starting the engine ...... 148 Tail light bulbs ...... 88 rear ...... 80 after the fuel tank has been run dry ...... 149 Tail lights Towline anchorages ...... 51, 80 diesel ...... 148 access ...... 88 Traction control system ...... 152, 153, 154 petrol ...... 148 change ...... 89 control lamp ...... 153 Starting the vehicle ...... 21 summary ...... 88 Trailer ...... 183 Steel wheel rims Taking care of your vehicle ...... 188 mode ...... 183, 217 cleaning ...... 193 Technical specifications ...... 216 parking Aid ...... 177 Steering ...... 58, 147 Temperature display Trailer turn signals control lamp ...... 145 engine oil ...... 31 control lamp ...... 119 electromechanical ...... 146 outside temperature ...... 27 Trailer weights ...... 217 power ...... 146 Tightening the belt ...... 65 Transporting children ...... 72 power-assisted steering ...... 146 Tightening torque of wheel bolts ...... 218 Transporting items steering column lock ...... 146 Tilting panoramic roof ...... 116 fastening rings ...... 134 Steering wheel closing ...... 116 Transporting objects adjustment ...... 13 opening ...... 116 roof carrier system ...... 135 Steering wheel controls ...... 101 Tilting panoramic sunroof ...... 11 roof luggage rack ...... 135 Steering wheel height adjustment ...... 58 convenience closing ...... 116 Turn signal lever ...... 119 Storage compartment roll-back function ...... 117 Turn signals glove compartment lighting ...... 122 Timer ...... 31 control lamp ...... 119 of front door panel ...... 131 lap times ...... 31 Two-way radios ...... 188 on the driver side ...... 130 menu ...... 31 Tyre mobility set ...... 46 on the front passenger side ...... 130 statistics ...... 31 components ...... 77 right front seat ...... 131 Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) ...... 158 sealing a tyre ...... 77 storage pocket in the seat ...... 131 Tire Mobility Set Tyre Mobility System Storage compartments ...... 130 inflating a tyre ...... 77 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 76 Sun visor Top speed ...... 32 Tyre pressure monitoring system ...... 211 sliding/tilting sunroof ...... 116 Top Tether ...... 18, 20 Tyre pressures ...... 218 Sun visors ...... 123 Top Tether system ...... 18 Tyre profile ...... 211 Switch Top Tether System ...... 20 Tyre repair ...... 76 hazard warning lights ...... 121 Tow-starting ...... 52, 79 Tyre repair kit Switching off the engine ...... 149 Towing bracket see Anti-puncture kit ...... 76 Switching off the lights ...... 117 ball coupling ...... 184 Switching on the lights ...... 117 retrofitting ...... 185 241 Index

Tyres ...... 210 Vehicle care Warning messages changing ...... 47 windscreen wipers service position ...... 54 red ...... 98 new tyres ...... 212 Vehicle documentation compartment ...... 130 yellow ...... 98 pressure ...... 210, 211, 213 Vehicle interior heating or cooling system . . . . . 141 Warning symbols ...... 98 useful life ...... 211 Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system see also Warning and control lamps ...... 98 wear indicators ...... 211 activation ...... 113 Warning triangle ...... 121 with directional tread ...... 49 Vehicle paint Washing with directional tread pattern ...... 210 code ...... 216 care of the vehicle exterior ...... 189 Tyre tread depth ...... 211 Vehicle paintwork Washing the vehicle ...... 189 Tyre wear ...... 211 Maintenance ...... 191 high pressure cleaners ...... 190 polishing ...... 191 stickers ...... 191 U products for vehicle maintenance ...... 189 Weights ...... 217 Unfastening the seat belt ...... 12, 64 Vehicle seats ...... 61 Wheel balance ...... 211 Unlocking and locking vehicle tools ...... 47 Wheel bolts ...... 218 by remote control ...... 110 Vehicle tools anti-theft ...... 48 with the central lock button ...... 108 housing ...... 75 caps ...... 47 Unlocking manually Vehicle underbody loosening ...... 48 rear lid ...... 10 protection ...... 193 tightening torque ...... 213 Upholstery: cleaning ...... 194 Vehicle washing ...... 189 Wheel cover ...... 47 USB/AUX-IN input ...... 105 Ventilation ...... 140 removing ...... 47 Ventilation slits ...... 134 Wheels ...... 210, 218 V anti-theft bolts ...... 48 chains ...... 218 Vanity mirror ...... 123 W changing ...... 47 Vehicle Warning and control lamp new wheels ...... 212 data sticker ...... 216 cruise control ...... 180 removing and fitting ...... 49 identification data ...... 216 Warning and control lamps ...... 98 snow chains ...... 50 identification number ...... 216 audible warning signal ...... 98 wheel cover ...... 47 raising ...... 48 engine management ...... 168 Windows vehicle identification number ...... 216 engine pre-heating/fault system ...... 168 electric ...... 11, 114 Vehicle battery ...... 43, 207 instrument panel display ...... 36 removing ice ...... 192 assisted starting ...... 52 Warning and indication lamps Window wiper blade ...... 23 changing ...... 209 airbags ...... 70 Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 78 charging ...... 209 instrument panel ...... 35 Windscreen defrosting ...... 140 connecting and disconnecting ...... 207 seat belt ...... 62 Windscreen washer ...... 43, 123 disconnect and connect ...... 34 tyres ...... 213 Windscreen washer fluid electrolyte level ...... 209 control lamp ...... 123 winter conditions ...... 207 242 Index

Windscreen washer water check ...... 207 filling amounts ...... 207 topping up ...... 207 Windscreen wiper blades cleaning ...... 192 Windscreen wipers ...... 23, 123 lifting the wiper blades ...... 54 replacing the wiper blades ...... 54 service position ...... 54 Winter conditions battery ...... 207 diesel ...... 197 snow chains ...... 50 thawing windows ...... 192 tyres ...... 214 Winter tyres sizes ...... 214 X XDS ...... 156

243

About this manual The equipment marked with an aster- For the sake of the environment isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental tional extras for some versions, or are equipment supplied with the vehicle at the protection. time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries. units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with Note until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. Because this is a general manual for the IBIZA >> The section is continued on the follow- range, some of the equipment and functions ing page. that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts, Important warnings on a given page which are: cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page 3. Emergencies The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details. Audiovisual material on a given page 5. Tips The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the WARNING At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason cept when otherwise indicated. mation on safety. They warn you about possi- find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. ble dangers of accident or injury. The audiovisual material only is intended to All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error help users to understand certain car function- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. alities better. It does not replace the instruc- CAUTION Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- Texts with this symbol draw your attention to SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. al to obtain more comprehensive information potential sources of damage to your vehicle. and indications. All rights on changes are reserved. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16 OWNER’S MANUAL Ibiza 6P0012720BD Inglés (11.16)

6P0012720BD (11.16)

SEAT recommends SEAT recommends

Inglés SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional Ibiza